The URL can be used to link to this page

BGC Electrical Systems Upgrade►`I I W.tli we] Ke7_,%. 17i7:� CONTRACT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS UPGRADE TABLE OF CONTENTS ARTICLE I: THE WORK Page 1.1 Performance of the Work...........................................................................................1 1.2 Commencement and Completion Dates..................................................................... 2 1.3 Required Submittals...................................................................................................2 A. Submittals Required................................................................................................... 2 B. Number and Format....................................................................................................2 C. Time of Submission and Owner's Review.................................................................2 D. Responsibility for Delay.............................................................................................2 1.4 Review and Interpretation of Contract Provisions..................................................... 3 1.5 Conditions at the Work Site; Record Drawings.........................................................3 1.6 Technical Ability to Perform......................................................................................4 1.7 Financial Ability to Perform.......................................................................................4 1.8 Time............................................................................................................................4 1.9 Safety at the Work Site...............................................................................................4 1.10 Cleanliness of the Work Site and Environs................................................................5 1.11 Damage to the Work, the Work Site, and Other Property .......................................... 5 1.12 Subcontractors and Suppliers..................................................................................... 5 A. Approval and Use of Subcontractors and Suppliers ................................................... 5 B. Removal of Subcontractors and Suppliers.................................................................6 1.13 Simultaneous Work By Others...................................................................................6 1.14 Occupancy Prior to Final Payment.............................................................................6 1.15 Owner's Right to Terminate or Suspend Work for Convenience ..............................6 A. Termination or Suspension for Convenience............................................................. 6 B. Payment for Completed Work....................................................................................6 ARTICLE Il: CHANGES AND DELAYS.............................................................................7 2.1 Changes...................................................................................................................... 7 -i- 2.2 Delays.........................................................................................................................7 A. Extensions for Unavoidable Delays...........................................................................7 B. No Compensation for Delays.....................................................................................7 ARTICLE III: CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR DEFECTIVE WORK ....... 7 3.1 Inspection; Testing; Correction of Defects.................................................................7 A. Inspection................................................................................................................... 7 B. Re-Inspection..............................................................................................................7 C. Correction...................................................................................................................8 3.2 Warranty of Work.......................................................................................................8 A. Scope of Warranty......................................................................................................8 B. Repairs; Extension of Warranty................................................................................. 8 C. Subcontractor and Supplier Warranties......................................................................8 3.3 Owner's Right to Correct...........................................................................................8 ARTICLE IV: FINANCIAL ASSURANCES........................................................................9 4.1 Bonds..........................................................................................................................9 4.2 Insurance..................................................................................................................... 9 4.3 Indemnification........................................................................................................... 9 ARTICLE V: PAYMENT.......................................................................................................9 5.1 Contract Price.............................................................................................................9 5.2 Taxes and Benefits..................................................................................................... 9 5.3 Progress Payments....................................................................................................10 A. Payment in Installments...........................................................................................10 B. Pay Requests.............................................................................................................10 C. Work Entire..............................................................................................................10 5.4 Final Acceptance and Final Payment.......................................................................10 A. Notice of Completion...............................................................................................10 B. Punch List and Final Acceptance.............................................................................10 C. Final Payment...........................................................................................................10 5.5 Liens.........................................................................................................................11 A. Title...........................................................................................................................11 B. Waivers of Lien........................................................................................................11 C. Removal of Liens.....................................................................................................11 D. Protection of Owner Only........................................................................................11 5.6 Deductions................................................................................................................11 A. Owner's Right to Withhold......................................................................................11 B. Use of Withheld Funds.............................................................................................12 ARTICLE VI: DISPUTES AND REMEDIES.....................................................................12 6.1 Dispute Resolution Procedure.................................................................................. 12 A. Notice of Disputes and Objections...........................................................................12 B. Negotiation of Disputes and Objections...................................................................12 6.2 Contractor's Remedies.............................................................................................13 6.3 Owner's Remedies....................................................................................................13 6.4 Owner's Additional Remedy for Delay....................................................................14 6.5 Terminations and Suspensions Deemed for Convenience.......................................14 ARTICLE VII: LEGAL RELATIONSHIPS AND REQUIREMENTS ...........................14 7.1 Binding Effect..........................................................................................................14 7.2 Relationship of the Parties........................................................................................15 7.3 No Collusion/Prohibited Interests............................................................................15 7.4 Assignment...............................................................................................................15 7.5 Confidential Information..........................................................................................15 7.6 No Waiver................................................................................................................16 7.7 No Third Party Beneficiaries....................................................................................16 7.8 Notices......................................................................................................................16 7.9 Governing Laws.......................................................................................................17 7.10 Changes in Laws.......................................................................................................17 7.11 Compliance with Laws.............................................................................................17 A. Compliance Required...............................................................................................17 B. Liability for Fines, Penalties.....................................................................................17 C. Prevailing Wage Act.................................................................................................17 D. Required Provisions Deemed Inserted.....................................................................18 7.12 Compliance with Patents..........................................................................................18 A. Assumption of Costs, Royalties, and Fees...............................................................18 B. Effect of Contractor Being Enjoined........................................................................18 7.13 Time..........................................................................................................................18 7.14 Severability...............................................................................................................19 7.15 Entire Agreement......................................................................................................19 7.16 Amendments.............................................................................................................19 Contractor's Certification Attachment A: Supplemental Schedule of Contract Terms Attachment B: Specifications Attachment C: List of Drawings Attachment D: Special Project Requirements Appendix 1: Prevailing Wages Appendix 2: Form of Performance Bond Appendix 3: Form of Labor and Materials Bond -rv- In consideration of the mutual promises set forth below, the Village of Oak Brook, 1200 Oak Brook Road, Oak Brook, Illinois, 60523, an Illinois municipal corporation ("Owner"), and Airport Electric Company, 6342 S. Central Avenue, Chicago, Illinois 60638 a Corporation ("Contractor"), make this Contract as of 2017 (the "Effective Date") and hereby agree as follows: ARTICLE I: THE WORK 1.1 Performance of the Work Contractor, at its sole cost and expense, must provide, perform, and complete all of the following, all of which is herein referred to as the "Fork": 1. Labor, Equipment, Materials, and Supplies. Provide, perform, and complete, in the manner described and specified in this Contract, all necessary work, labor, services, transportation, equipment, materials, apparatus, machinery, tools, fuels, gas, electric, water, waste disposal, information, data, and other means and items necessary to accomplish the Project at the Work Site, both as defined in Attachment A, in accordance with the specifications attached hereto as Attachment B, the drawings identified in the list attached hereto as Attachment C, and the Special Project Requirements attached hereto as Attachment D. 2. Permits. Except as otherwise provided in Attachment A, procure and furnish all permits, licenses, and other governmental approvals and authorizations necessary in connection therewith. 3. Bonds and Insurance. Procure and furnish all Bonds and all certificates of insurance specified in this Contract. 4. Taxes. Pay all applicable federal, state, and local taxes. 5. Miscellaneous. Do all other things required of Contractor by this Contract, including without limitation arranging for utility and other services needed for the Work and for testing, including the installation of temporary utility lines, wiring, switches, fixtures, hoses, connections, and meters, and providing sufficient sanitary conveniences and shelters to accommodate all workers and all personnel of Owner engaged in the Work. 6. Qualit . Provide, perform, and complete all of the foregoing in a proper and workmanlike manner, consistent with the highest standards of professional and -I- CONTRACT construction practices and in full compliance with, and as required by or pursuant to, this Contract, and with the greatest economy, efficiency, and expedition consistent therewith, with only new, undamaged and first quality equipment, materials, and supplies. 1.2 Commencement and Completion Dates Contractor must commence the Work not later than the "Commencement Date" set forth on Attachment A and must diligently and continuously prosecute the Work at such a rate as will allow the Work to be fully provided, performed, and completed in full compliance with this Contract not later than the "Completion Date" set forth in Attachment A. The time of commencement, rate of progress, and time of completion are referred to in this Contract as the "Contract Time." 1.3 Required Submittals A. Submittals Required. Contractor must submit to Owner all documents, data, and information specifically required to be submitted by Contractor under this Contract and must, in addition, submit to Owner all such drawings, specifications, descriptive information, and engineering documents, data, and information as may be required, or as may be requested by Owner, to show the details of the Work, including a complete description of all equipment, materials, and supplies to be provided under this Contract ("Required Submittals"). Such details must include, but are not limited to, design data, structural and operating features, principal dimensions, space required or provided, clearances required or provided, type and brand of finish, and all similar matters, for all components of the Work. B. Number and Format. Contractor must provide three complete sets for each Required Submittal. All Required Submittals must be prepared on white 8-1 /2"xl 1" paper. C. Time of Submission and Owner's Review. All Required Submittals must be provided to Owner no later than the time, if any, specified in this Contract for their submission or, if no time for submission is specified, in sufficient time, in Owner's sole opinion, to permit Owner to review the same prior to the commencement of the part of the Work to which they relate and prior to the purchase of any equipment, materials, or supplies that they describe. Owner will have the right to require such corrections as may be necessary to make such submittals conform to this Contract. All such submittals will, after final processing and review with no exception noted by Owner, become a part of this Contract. No Work related to any submittal may be performed by Contractor until Owner has completed review of such submittal with no exception noted. Owner's review and stamping of any Required Submittal will be for the sole purpose of examining the general management, design, and details of the proposed Work, does not relieve Contractor of the entire responsibility for the performance of the Work in full compliance with, and as required by or pursuant to this Contract, and may not be regarded as any assumption of risk or liability by Owner. D. Responsibility for Delay. Contractor is responsible for any delay in the Work due to delay in providing Required Submittals conforming to this Contract. -2- CONTRACT 1.4 Review and Interpretation of Contract Provisions Contractor represents and warrants that it has carefully reviewed this Contract, including all of its Attachments, and the drawings identified in Attachment C, all of which are by this reference incorporated into and made a part of this Contract. Contractor must, at no increase in the Contract Price, provide workmanship, equipment, materials, and supplies that fully conform to this Contract. Whenever any equipment, materials or supplies are specified or described in this Contract by using the name or other identifying feature of a proprietary product or the name or other identifying feature of a particular manufacturer or vendor, the specific item mentioned is understood as establishing the type, function and quality desired. Other manufacturers' or vendors' products may be accepted, provided that the products proposed are equivalent in substance and function to those named as determined by Owner in its sole and absolute discretion. Contractor must promptly notify Owner of any discrepancy, error, omission, ambiguity, or conflict among any of the provisions of this Contract before proceeding with any Work affected thereby. If Contractor fails to give such notice to Owner, then the subsequent decision of Owner as to which provision of this Contract governs is final, and any corrective work required does not entitle Contractor to any damages, to any compensation in excess of the Contract Price, or to any delay or extension of the Contract Time. When the equipment, materials, or supplies furnished by Contractor cannot be installed as specified in this Contract, Contractor must, without any increase in the Contract Price, make all modifications required to properly install the equipment, materials, or supplies. Any such modification is subject to the prior review and consent of Owner. 1.5 Conditions at the Work Site; Record Drawings Contractor represents and warrants that it has had a sufficient opportunity to conduct a thorough investigation of the Work Site and the surrounding area and has completed such investigation to its satisfaction. Contractor will have no claim for damages, for compensation in excess of the Contract Price, or for a delay or extension of the Contract Time based upon conditions found at, or in the vicinity of, the Work Site. When information pertaining to subsurface, underground or other concealed conditions, soils analysis, borings, test pits, utility locations or conditions, buried structures, condition of existing structures, and other investigations is or has been provided by Owner, or is or has been otherwise made available to Contractor by Owner, such information is or has been provided or made available solely for the convenience of Contractor and is not part of this Contract. Owner assumes no responsibility whatever in respect to the sufficiency or accuracy of such information, and there is no guaranty or warranty, either expressed or implied, that the conditions indicated are representative of those existing throughout the Work or the Work Site, or that the conditions indicated are representative of those existing at any particular location, or that the conditions indicated may not change, or that unanticipated conditions may not be present. -3- CONTRACT Contractor is solely responsible for locating all existing underground installations by prospecting no later than two workdays prior to any scheduled excavation or trenching, whichever is earlier. Contractor must check all dimensions, elevations, and quantities indicated in this Contract within the same time period as set forth above for prospecting underground installations. Contractor must lay out the Work in accordance with this Contract and must establish and maintain such locations, lines and levels. Wherever pre-existing work is encountered, Contractor must verify and be responsible for dimensions and location of such pre- existing work. Contractor must notify Owner of any discrepancy between the dimensions, elevations and quantities indicated in this Contract and the conditions of the Work Site or any other errors, omissions or discrepancies which Contract may discover during such inspections. Full instructions will be famished by Owner should such error, omission, or discrepancy be discovered, and Contractor must carry out such instructions as if originally specified and without any increase in Contract Price. Before Final Acceptance of the Work, Contractor must submit to Owner two sets of Drawings of Record, unless a greater number is specified elsewhere in this Contract, indicating all field deviations from Attachment B or the drawings identified in Attachment C. 1.6 Technical Ability to Perform Contractor represents and warrants that it is sufficiently experienced and competent, and has the necessary capital, facilities, plant, organization, and staff, to provide, perform and complete the Work in full compliance with, and as required by or pursuant to, this Contract. 1.7 Financial Ability to Perform Contractor represents and warrants that it is financially solvent, and Contractor has the financial resources necessary to provide, perform and complete the Work in full compliance with, and as required by or pursuant to, this Contract. 1.8 Time Contractor represents and warrants that it is ready, willing, able and prepared to begin the Work on the Commencement Date and that the Contract Time is sufficient time to permit completion of the Work in full compliance with, and as required by or pursuant to, this Contract for the Contract Price, all with due regard to all natural and man-made conditions that may affect the Work or the Work Site and all difficulties, hindrances, and delays that may be incident to the Work. 1.9 Safety at the Work Site Contractor is solely and completely responsible for providing and maintaining safe conditions at the Work Site, including the safety of all persons and property during performance of the Work. This requirement applies continuously and is not limited to normal working hours. Contractor must take all safety precautions as necessary to comply with all applicable laws and to prevent injury to persons and damage to property. -4- CONTRACT Contractor must conduct all of its operations without interruption or interference with vehicular and pedestrian traffic on public and private rights-of-way, unless it has obtained permits therefor from the proper authorities. If any public or private right-of-way are rendered unsafe by Contractor's operations, Contractor must make such repairs or provide such temporary ways or guards as are acceptable to the proper authorities. 1.10 Cleanliness of the Work Site and Environs Contractor must keep the Work Site and adjacent areas clean at all times during performance of the Work and must, upon completion of the Work, leave the Work Site and adjacent areas in a clean and orderly condition. 1.11 Damase to the Work, the Work Site. and Other Prover The Work and everything pertaining thereto is provided, performed, completed, and maintained at the sole risk and cost of Contractor from the Commencement Date until Final Payment. Contractor is fully responsible for the protection of all public and private property and all persons. Without limiting the foregoing, Contractor must, at its own cost and expense, provide all permanent and temporary shoring, anchoring and bracing required by the nature of the Work in order to make all parts absolutely stable and rigid, even when such shoring, anchoring and bracing is not explicitly specified, and support and protect all buildings, bridges, roadways, conduits, wires, water pipes, gas pipes, sewers, pavements, curbs, sidewalks, fixtures and landscaping of all kinds and all other public or private property that may be encountered or endangered in providing, performing and completing the Work. Contractor will have no claim against Owner because of any damage or loss to the Work or to Contractor's equipment, materials, or supplies from any cause whatsoever, including damage or loss due to simultaneous work by others. Contractor must, promptly and without charge to Owner, repair or replace, to the satisfaction of Owner, any damage done to, and any loss suffered by, the Work and any damage done to, and any loss suffered by, the Work Site or other property as a result of the Work. Notwithstanding any other provision of this Contract, Contractor's obligations under this Section exist without regard to, and may not be construed to be waived by, the availability or unavailability of any insurance, either of Owner or Contractor, to indemnify, hold harmless, or reimburse Contractor for the cost of any repair or replacement work required by this Section. 1.12 Subcontractors and Suppliers A. Approval and Use of Subcontractors and Suppliers. Contractor must perform the Work with its own personnel and under the management, supervision, and control of its own organization unless otherwise approved by Owner in writing. All subcontractors, suppliers, and subcontracts used by Contractor must be acceptable to, and approved in advance by, Owner. Owner's approval of any subcontractor, supplier, and subcontract does not relieve Contractor of full responsibility and liability for the provision, performance, and completion of the Work in full compliance with, and as required by or pursuant to, this Contract. All Work performed under any subcontract is subject to all of the provisions of this Contract in the same manner as if performed by employees of Contractor. Every reference in this Contract to "Contractor" is -5- CONTRACT deemed also to refer to all subcontractors and suppliers of Contractor. Every subcontract must include a provision binding the subcontractor or supplier to all provisions of this Contract. B. Removal of Subcontractors and Suppliers. If any subcontractor or supplier fails to perform the part of the Work undertaken by it in a manner satisfactory to Owner, Contractor must immediately upon notice from Owner terminate such subcontractor or supplier. Contractor will have no claim for damages, for compensation in excess of the Contract Price, or for a delay or extension of the Contract Time as a result of any such termination. 1.13 Simultaneous Work By Others Owner has the right to perform or have performed such other work as Owner may desire in, about, or near the Work Site during the performance of the Work by Contractor. Contractor must make every reasonable effort to perform the Work in such manner as to enable both the Work and such other work to be completed without hindrance or interference from each other. Contractor must afford Owner and other contractors reasonable opportunity for the execution of such other work and must properly coordinate the Work with such other work. 1.14 Occupancy Prior to Final Payment Owner will have the right, at its election, to occupy, use, or place in service any part of the Work prior to Final Payment. Such occupancy, use, or placement in service must be conducted in such manner as not to damage any of the Work or to unreasonably interfere with the progress of the Work. No such occupancy, use, or placement in service may be construed as an acceptance of any of the Work or a release or satisfaction of Contractor's duty to insure and protect the Work, nor may it, unless conducted in an unreasonable manner, be considered as an interference with Contractor's provision, performance, or completion of the Work. 1.15 Owner's Right to Terminate or Suspend Work for Convenience A. Termination or Suspension for Convenience. Owner has the right, for its convenience, to terminate or suspend the Work in whole or in part at any time by written notice to Contractor. Every such notice must state the extent and effective date of such termination or suspension. On such effective date, Contractor must, as and to the extent directed, stop Work under this Contract, cease all placement of further orders or subcontracts, terminate or suspend Work under existing orders and subcontracts, cancel any outstanding orders or subcontracts that may be cancelled, and take any action necessary to protect any property in its possession in which Owner has or may acquire any interest and to dispose of such property in such manner as may be directed by Owner. B. Payment for Completed Work. In the event of any termination pursuant to Subsection 1.15A above, Owner must pay Contractor (1) such direct costs, excluding overhead, as Contractor has paid or incurred for all Work done in compliance with, and as required by or pursuant to, this Contract up to the effective date of termination together with ten percent of such costs for overhead and profit; and (2) such other costs pertaining to the Work, exclusive of overhead and profit, as Contractor may have reasonably and necessarily incurred as the result of -6- CONTRACT such termination. Any such payment may be offset by any prior payment or payments and is subject to Owner's rights to withhold and deduct as provided in this Contract. ARTICLE II: CHANGES AND DELAYS 2.1 Changes Owner has the right, by written order executed by Owner, to make changes in the Contract, the Work, the Work Site, and the Contract Time ("Change Order"). If any Change Order causes an increase or decrease in the amount of the Work, an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Time may be made. All claims by Contractor for an equitable adjustment in either the Contract Price or the Contract Time must be made within two business days following receipt of such Change Order, and may, if not made prior to such time, be conclusively deemed to have been waived. No decrease in the amount of the Work caused by any Change Order will entitle Contractor to make any claim for damages, anticipated profits, or other compensation. 2.2 Delays A. Extensions for Unavoidable Delays. For any delay that may result from causes that could not be avoided or controlled by Contractor, Contractor must, upon timely written application, be entitled to issuance of a Change Order providing for an extension of the Contract Time for a period of time equal to the delay resulting from such unavoidable cause. No extension of the Contract Time will be allowed for any other delay in completion of the Work. B. No Compensation for Delays. No payment, compensation, damages, or adjustment of any kind, other than the extension of the Contract Time provided in Subsection 2.2A above, may be made to, or claimed by, Contractor because of hindrances or delays from any cause in the commencement, prosecution, or completion of the Work, whether caused by Owner or any other party and whether avoidable or unavoidable. ARTICLE III: CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR DEFECTIVE WORK 3.1 Inspection; Testing; Correction of Defects A. Inspection. Until Final Payment, all parts of the Work are subject to inspection and testing by Owner or its designated representatives. Contractor must furnish, at its own expense, all reasonable access, assistance, and facilities required by Owner for such inspection and testing. B. Re -Inspection. Re -inspection and re -testing of any Work may be ordered by Owner at any time, and, if so ordered, any covered or closed Work must be uncovered or opened by Contractor. If the Work is found to be in full compliance with this Contract, then Owner must pay the cost of uncovering, opening, re -inspecting, or re -testing, as the case may be. If such Work is not in full compliance with this Contract, then Contractor must pay such cost. -7- CONTRACT C. Correction. Until Final Payment, Contractor must, promptly and without charge, repair, correct, or replace all or any part of the Work that is defective, damaged, flawed, or unsuitable or that in any way fails to conform strictly to the requirements of this Contract. 3.2 Warranty of Work A. Scope of Warranty. Contractor warrants that the Work and all of its components will be free from defects and flaws in design, workmanship, and materials; must strictly conform to the requirements of this Contract; and will be fit, sufficient, and suitable for the purposes expressed in, or reasonably inferred from, this Contract. The warranty herein expressed is in addition to any other warranties expressed in this Contract, or expressed or implied by law, which are hereby reserved unto Owner. B. Repairs; Extension of Warranty_. Contractor, promptly and without charge, must correct any failure to fulfill the above warranty that may be discovered or develop at any time within one year after Final Payment or such longer period as may be prescribed in Attachment B or Attachment D to this Contract or by law. The above warranty may be extended automatically to cover all repaired and replacement parts and labor provided or performed under such warranty and Contractor's obligation to correct Work may be extended for a period of one year from the date of such repair or replacement. The time period established in this Subsection 3.213 relates only to the specific obligation of Contractor to correct Work and may not be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to other obligations that Contractor has under this Contract. C. Subcontractor and Supplier Warranties. Whenever Attachment B or Attachment D requires a subcontractor or supplier to provide a guaranty or warranty, Contractor is solely responsible for obtaining said guaranty or warranty in form satisfactory to Owner and assigning said warranty or guaranty to Owner. Acceptance of any assigned warranties or guaranties by Owner is a precondition to Final Payment and does not relieve Contractor of any of its guaranty or warranty obligations under this Contract. 3.3 Owner's Right to Correct If, within two business days after Owner gives Contractor notice of any defect, damage, flaw, unsuitability, nonconformity, or failure to meet warranty subject to correction by Contractor pursuant to Section 3.1 or Section 3.2 of this Contract, Contractor neglects to make, or undertake with due diligence to make, the necessary corrections, then Owner is entitled to make, either with its own forces or with contract forces, the corrections and to recover from Contractor all resulting costs, expenses, losses, or damages, including attorneys' fees and administrative expenses. ARTICLE IV: FINANCIAL ASSURANCES 4.1 Bonds CONTRACT Contemporaneous with Contractor's execution of this Contract, Contractor must provide a Performance Bond and a Labor and Material Payment Bond, on forms provided by, or otherwise acceptable to, Owner, from a surety company licensed to do business in the State of Illinois with a general rating of A and a financial size category of Class X or better in Best's Insurance Guide, each in the penal sum of the Contract Price ("Bonds"). Contractor, at all times while providing, performing, or completing the Work, including, without limitation, at all times while correcting any failure to meet warranty pursuant to Section 3.2 of this Contract, must maintain and keep in force, at Contractor's expense, the Bonds required hereunder. 4.2 Insurance Contractor hereby agrees and will, at its expense, carry insurance pursuant to the terms, conditions, and coverages set forth in Attachment A. 4.3 Indemnification Contractor hereby agrees to and will indemnify and save harmless Owner and all of it elected officials, officers, employees, attorneys, agents, and representatives against any and all lawsuits, claims, demands, damages, liabilities, losses, and expenses, including attorneys' fees and administrative expenses, that may arise, or be alleged to have arisen, out of or in connection with Contractor's performance of, or failure to perform, the Work or any part thereof, whether or not due or claimed to be due in whole or in part to the active, passive, or concurrent negligence or fault of Contractor, except to the extent caused solely by the negligence of Owner. ARTICLE V: PAYMENT 5.1 Contract Price Owner must pay to Contractor, in accordance with and subject to the terns and conditions set forth in this Article V and Attachment A, and Contractor must accept in full satisfaction for providing, performing, and completing the Work, the amount or amounts set forth in Attachment A (the "Contract Price"), subject to any additions, deductions, or withholdings provided for in this Contract. 5.2 Taxes and Benefits Owner is exempt from and will not be responsible to pay, or reimburse Contractor for, any state or local sales, use, or excise taxes. The Contract Price includes all other applicable federal, state, and local taxes of every kind and nature applicable to the Work as well as all taxes, contributions, and premiums for unemployment insurance, old age or retirement benefits, pensions, annuities, or other similar benefits. All claim or right to claim additional compensation -9- CONTRACT by reason of the payment of any such tax, contribution, or premium is hereby waived and released by Contractor. 5.3 Proeress Payments A. Payment in Installments. The Contract Price must be paid in monthly installments in the manner set forth in Attachment A ("Progress Payments"). B. Pay Requests. The Village of Oak Brook authorizes the payment of invoices on the second and fourth Tuesday of the month. For consideration on one of these dates, payment request must be received no later than fourteen (14) days prior to the second or fourth Tuesday of the month. Each Pay Request must include (a) Contractor's certification of the value of, and partial or final waivers of lien covering, all Work for which payment is then requested and (b) Contractor's certification that all prior Progress Payments have been properly applied to the payment or reimbursement of the costs with respect to which they were paid. C. Work Entire. This Contract and the Work are entire and the Work as a whole is of the essence of this Contract. Notwithstanding any other provision of this Contract, each and every part of this Contract and of the Work are interdependent and common to one another and to Owner's obligation to pay all or any part of the Contract Price or any other consideration for the Work. Any and all Progress Payments made pursuant to this Article are provided merely for the convenience of Contractor and for no other purpose. 5.4 Final Acceptance and Final Pavment A. Notice of Completion. When the Work has been completed and is ready in all respects for acceptance by Owner, Contractor must notify Owner and request a final inspection ("Notice of Completion"). Contractor's Notice of Completion must be given sufficiently in advance of the Completion Date to allow for scheduling of the final inspection and for completion or correction before the Completion Date of any items identified by such inspection as being defective, damaged, flawed, unsuitable, nonconforming, incomplete, or otherwise not in full compliance with, or as required by or pursuant to, this Contract ("Punch List Work"). B. Punch List and Final Acceptance. The Work may be finally accepted when, and only when, the whole and all parts thereof have been completed to the satisfaction of Owner in full compliance with, and as required by or pursuant to, this Contract. Upon receipt of Contractor's Notice of Completion, Owner must make a review of the Work and notify Contractor in writing of all Punch List Work, if any, to be completed or corrected. Following Contractor's completion or correction of all Punch List Work, Owner must make another review of the Work and prepare and deliver to Contractor either a written notice of additional Punch List Work to be completed or corrected or a written notice of final acceptance of the Work ("Final Acceptance"). C. Final Payment. As soon as practicable after Final Acceptance, Contractor must submit to Owner a properly completed final Pay Request in the form provided by Owner ("Final Pay Request"). Owner must pay to Contractor the balance of the Contract Price, after deducting -10- CONTRACT therefrom all charges against Contractor as provided for in this Contract ("Final Paymena" ). Final Payment must be made not later than 60 days after Owner approves the Final Pay Request. The acceptance by Contractor of Final Payment will operate as a full and complete release of Owner of and from any and all lawsuits, claims, demands, damages, liabilities, losses, and expenses of, by, or to Contractor for anything done, furnished for, arising out of, relating to, or in connection with the Work or for or on account of any act or neglect of Owner arising out of, relating to, or in connection with the Work. 5.5 Liens A. Title. Nothing in this Contract may be construed as vesting in Contractor any right of property in any equipment, materials, supplies, and other items provided under this Contract after they have been installed in, incorporated into, attached to, or affixed to, the Work or the Work Site. All such equipment, materials, supplies, and other items will, upon being so installed, incorporated, attached or affixed, become the property of Owner, but such title will not release Contractor from its duty to insure and protect the Work in accordance with the requirements of this Contract. B. Waivers of Lien. Contractor must, from time to time at Owner's request and in any event prior to Final Payment, furnish to Owner such receipts, releases, affidavits, certificates, and other evidence as may be necessary to establish, to the reasonable satisfaction of Owner, that no lien against the Work or the public funds held by Owner exists in favor of any person whatsoever for or by reason of any equipment, material, supplies, or other item furnished, labor performed, or other thing done in connection with the Work or this Contract ("Lien") and that no right to file any Lien exists in favor of any person whatsoever. C. Removal of Liens. If at any time any notice of any Lien is filed, then Contractor must, promptly and without charge, discharge, remove, or otherwise dispose of such Lien. Until such discharge, removal, or disposition, Owner will have the right to retain from any money payable hereunder an amount that Owner, in its sole judgment, deems necessary to satisfy such Lien and to pay the costs and expenses, including attorneys' fees and administrative expenses, of any actions brought in connection therewith or by reason thereof. D. Protection of Owner Only. This Section does not operate to relieve Contractor's surety or sureties from any of their obligations under the Bonds, nor may it be deemed to vest any right, interest, or entitlement in any subcontractor or supplier. Owner's retention of funds pursuant to this Section is deemed solely for the protection of its own interests pending removal of such Liens by Contractor, and Owner will have no obligation to apply such funds to such removal but may, nevertheless, do so where Owner's interests would thereby be served. 5.6 Deductions A. Owner's Right to Withhold. Notwithstanding any other provision of this Contract and without prejudice to any of Owner's other rights or remedies, Owner will have the right at any time or times, whether before or after approval of any Pay Request, to deduct and withhold from any Progress or Final Payment that may be or become due under this Contract such amount CONTRACT as may reasonably appear necessary to compensate Owner for any actual or prospective loss due to: (1) Work that is defective, damaged, flawed, unsuitable, nonconforming, or incomplete; (2) damage for which Contractor is liable under this Contract; (3) state or local sales, use, or excise taxes from which Owner is exempt; (4) Liens or claims of Lien regardless of merit; (5) claims of subcontractors, suppliers, or other persons regardless of merit; (6) delay in the progress or completion of the Work; (7) inability of Contractor to complete the Work; (8) failure of Contractor to properly complete or document any Pay Request; (9) any other failure of Contractor to perform any of its obligations under this Contract; or (10) the cost to Owner, including attorneys' fees and administrative costs, of correcting any of the aforesaid matters or exercising any one or more of Owner's remedies set forth in Section 6.3 of this Contract. B. Use of Withheld Funds. Owner is entitled to retain any and all amounts withheld pursuant to Subsection 5.6A above until Contractor has either performed the obligations in question or furnished security for such performance satisfactory to Owner. Owner is entitled to apply any money withheld or any other money due Contractor under this Contract to reimburse itself for any and all costs, expenses, losses, damages, liabilities, suits, judgments, awards, attorneys' fees and administrative expenses incurred, suffered, or sustained by Owner and chargeable to Contractor under this Contract. ARTICLE VI: DISPUTES AND REMEDIES 6.1 Dispute Resolution Procedure A. Notice of Disputes and Objections. If Contractor disputes or objects to any requirement, direction, instruction, interpretation, determination, or decision of Owner, Contractor may notify Owner in writing of its dispute or objection and of the amount of any equitable adjustment to the Contract Price or Contract Time to which Contractor claims it will be entitled as a result thereof; provided, however, that Contractor must, nevertheless, proceed without delay to perform the Work as required, directed, instructed, interpreted, determined, or decided by Owner, without regard to such dispute or objection. Unless Contractor so notifies Owner within two business days after receipt of such requirement, direction, instruction, interpretation, determination, or decision, Contractor is conclusively deemed to have waived all such disputes or objections and all claims based thereon. B. Negotiation of Disputes and Objections. To avoid and settle without litigation any such dispute or objection, Owner and Contractor agree to engage in good faith negotiations. Within three business days after Owner's receipt of Contractor's written notice of dispute or objection, a conference between Owner and Contractor will be held to resolve the dispute. Within three business days after the end of the conference, Owner must render its final decision, in writing, to Contractor. If Contractor objects to the final decision of Owner, then it must, within three business days, give Owner notice thereof and, in such notice, must state its final demand for settlement of the dispute. Unless Contractor so notifies Owner, Contractor will be conclusively deemed (1) to have agreed to and accepted Owner's final decision and (2) to have waived all claims based on such final decision. _12. CONTRACT 6.2 Contractor's Remedies If Owner fails or refuses to satisfy a final demand made by Contractor pursuant to Section 6.1 of this Contract, or to otherwise resolve the dispute which is the subject of such demand to the satisfaction of Contractor, within 10 days after receipt of such demand, then Contractor will be entitled to pursue such remedies, not inconsistent with the provisions of this Contract, as it may have in law or equity. 6.3 Owner's Remedies If it should appear at any time prior to Final Payment that Contractor has failed or refused to prosecute, or has delayed in the prosecution of, the Work with diligence at a rate that assures completion of the Work in full compliance with the requirements of this Contract on or before the Completion Date, or has attempted to assign this Contract or Contractor's rights under this Contract, either in whole or in part, or has falsely made any representation or warranty in this Contract, or has otherwise failed, refused, or delayed to perform or satisfy any other requirement of this Contract or has failed to pay its debts as they come due ("Event of Default"), and has failed to cure any such Event of Default within five business days after Contractor's receipt of written notice of such Event of Default, then Owner will have the right, at its election and without prejudice to any other remedies provided by law or equity, to pursue any one or more of the following remedies: 1. Owner may require Contractor, within such reasonable time as may be fixed by Owner, to complete or correct all or any part of the Work that is defective, damaged, flawed, unsuitable, nonconforming, or incomplete; to remove from the Work Site any such Work; to accelerate all or any part of the Work; and to take any or all other action necessary to bring Contractor and the Work into strict compliance with this Contract. 2. Owner may perform or have performed all Work necessary for the accomplishment of the results stated in Paragraph 1 above and withhold or recover from Contractor all the cost and expense, including attorneys' fees and administrative costs, incurred by Owner in connection therewith. 3. Owner may accept the defective, damaged, flawed, unsuitable, nonconforming, incomplete, or dilatory Work or part thereof and make an equitable reduction in the Contract Price. 4. Owner may terminate this Contract without liability for further payment of amounts due or to become due under this Contract. 5. Owner may, without terminating this Contract, terminate Contractor's rights under this Contract and, for the purpose of completing or correcting the Work, evict Contractor and take possession of all equipment, materials, supplies, tools, appliances, plans, specifications, schedules, manuals, drawings, and other papers relating to the Work, whether at the Work Site or elsewhere, and either complete 13- CONTRACT or correct the Work with its own forces or contracted forces, all at Contractor's expense. 6. Upon any termination of this Contract or of Contractor's rights under this Contract, and at Owner's option exercised in writing, any or all subcontracts and supplier contracts of Contractor will be deemed to be assigned to Owner without any further action being required, but Owner may not thereby assume any obligation for payments due under such subcontracts and supplier contracts for any Work provided or performed prior to such assignment. 7. Owner may withhold from any Progress Payment or Final Payment, whether or not previously approved, or may recover from Contractor, any and all costs, including attorneys' fees and administrative expenses, incurred by Owner as the result of any Event of Default or as a result of actions taken by Owner in response to any Event of Default. 8. Owner may recover any damages suffered by Owner. 6.4 Owner's Additional Remedy for Delay If the Work is not completed by Contractor, in full compliance with, and as required by or pursuant to, this Contract, within the Contract Time as such time may be extended by Change Order, then Owner may invoke its remedies under Section 6.3 of this Contract or may, in the exercise of its sole and absolute discretion, permit Contractor to complete the Work but charge to Contractor, and deduct from any Progress or Final Payments, whether or not previously approved, administrative expenses and costs for each day completion of the Work is delayed beyond the Completion Date, computed on the basis of the "Per Diem Administrative Charge" set forth in Attachment A, as well as any additional damages caused by such delay. 6.5 Terminations and Suspensions Deemed for Convenience Any termination or suspension of Contractor's rights under this Contract for an alleged default that is ultimately held unjustified will automatically be deemed to be a termination or suspension for the convenience of Owner under Section 1.15 of this Contract. ARTICLE VII: LEGAL RELATIONSHIPS AND REQUIREMENTS 7.1 Binding Effect This Contract is binding on Owner and Contractor and on their respective heirs, executors, administrators, personal representatives, and permitted successors and assigns. Every reference in this Contract to a party is deemed to be a reference to the authorized officers, employees, agents, and representatives of such party. -14- CONTRACT 7.2 Relationship of the Parties Contractor will act as an independent contractor in providing and performing the Work. Nothing in, nor done pursuant to, this Contract may be construed (1) to create the relationship of principal and agent, partners, or joint venturers between Owner and Contractor or (2) except as provided in Paragraph 6.3(6) above, to create any relationship between Owner and any subcontractor or supplier of Contractor. 7.3 No Collusion/Prohibited Interests Contractor hereby represents that the only persons, firms, or corporations interested in this Contract as principals are those disclosed to Owner prior to the execution of this Contract, and that this Contract is made without collusion with any other person, firm, or corporation. If at any time it is found that Contractor has, in procuring this Contract, colluded with any other person, firm, or corporation, then Contractor will be liable to Owner for all loss or damage that Owner may suffer thereby, and this Contract will, at Owner's option, be null and void. Contractor hereby represents and warrants that neither Contractor nor any person affiliated with Contractor or that has an economic interest in Contractor or that has or will have an interest in the Work or will participate, in any manner whatsoever, in the Work is acting, directly or indirectly, for or on behalf of any person, group, entity or nation named by the United States Treasury Department as a Specially Designated National and Blocked Person, or for or on behalf of any person, group, entity or nation designated in Presidential Executive Order 13224 as a person who commits, threatens to commit, or supports terrorism, and neither Contractor nor any person affiliated with Contractor or that has an economic interest in Contractor or that has or will have an interest in the Work or will participate, in any manner whatsoever, in the Work is, directly or indirectly, engaged in, or facilitating, the Work on behalf of any such person, group, entity or nation. 7.4 Assignment Contractor may not (1) assign this Contract in whole or in part, (2) assign any of Contractor's rights or obligations under this Contract, or (3) assign any payment due or to become due under this Contract without the prior express written approval of Owner, which approval may be withheld in the sole and unfettered discretion of Owner; provided, however, that Owner's prior written approval will not be required for assignments of accounts, as defined in the Illinois Commercial Code, if to do so would violate Section 9-318 of the Illinois Commercial Code, 810 ILCS 5/9-318. Owner may assign this Contract, in whole or in part, or any or all of its rights or obligations under this Contract, without the consent of Contractor. 7.5 Confidential Information All information supplied by Owner to Contractor for or in cormection with this Contract or the Work must be held confidential by Contractor and may not, without the prior express written consent of Owner, be used for any purpose other than performance of the Work. -15- CONTRACT 7.6 No Waiver No examination, inspection, investigation, test, measurement, review, determination, decision, certificate, or approval by Owner, nor any order by Owner for the payment of money, nor any payment for, or use, occupancy, possession, or acceptance of, the whole or any part of the Work by Owner, nor any extension of time granted by Owner, nor any delay by Owner in exercising any right under this Contract, nor any other act or omission of Owner may constitute or be deemed to be an acceptance of any defective, damaged, flawed, unsuitable, nonconforming or incomplete Work, equipment, materials, or supplies, nor operate to waive or otherwise diminish the effect of any warranty or representation made by Contractor; or of any requirement or provision of this Contract; or of any remedy, power, or right of Owner. 7.7 No Third Party Beneficiaries No claim as a third party beneficiary under this Contract by any person, firm, or corporation other than Contractor may be made or be valid against Owner. 7.8 Notices All notices required or permitted to be given under this Contract must be in writing and are deemed received by the addressee thereof when delivered in person on a business day at the address set forth below or on the third business day after being deposited in any main or branch United States post office, for delivery at the address set forth below by properly addressed, postage prepaid, certified or registered mail, return receipt requested. Notices and communications to Owner must be addressed to, and delivered at, the following address: Village of Oak Brook 1200 Oak Brook Road Oak Brook, Illinois 60523 Attention: Doug Patchin, Public Works Director Notices and communications to Contractor must be addressed to, and delivered at, the following address: Airport Electric Company 6342 S. Central Avenue Chicago, Illinois 60638 Attention: Rosalie Stiegal, President The foregoing may not be deemed to preclude the use of other non -oral means of notification or to invalidate any notice properly given by any such other non -oral means. 16- ',iL17�I11 , I By notice complying with the requirements of this Section, Owner and Contractor each have the right to change the address or addressee or both for all future notices to it, but no notice of a change of address is effective until actually received. 7.9 Governing Laws This Contract and the rights of Owner and Contractor under this Contract will be interpreted according to the internal laws, but not the conflict of laws rules, of the State of Illinois; venue for any action related to this Contract will be in the Circuit Court of DuPage County, Illinois. 7.10 Changes in Laws Unless otherwise explicitly provided in this Contract, any reference to laws includes such laws as they may be amended or modified from time to time. 7.11 Compliance with Laws A. Compliance Required. Contractor must give all notices, pay all fees, and take all other action that may be necessary to ensure that the Work is provided, performed, and completed in accordance with all required governmental permits, licenses or other approvals and authorizations that may be required in connection with providing, performing, and completing the Work, and with all applicable statutes, ordinances, rules, and regulations, including without limitation the Illinois Prevailing Wage Act, 820 ILCS 130/0.01 et seq. (see Subsection C of this Section) (a copy of the prevailing rate of wages ascertained by the Illinois Department of Labor, in effect as of the date of this Contract, has been attached as an Appendix to this Contract; if the Illinois Department of Labor revises the prevailing rate of hourly wages to be paid, the revised rate applies to this Contract); any other applicable prevailing wage laws; the Fair Labor Standards Act; any statutes regarding qualification to do business; any statutes requiring preference to laborers of specified classes; the Illinois Steel Products Procurement Act, 30 ILCS 565/1 et seq.; any statutes prohibiting discrimination because of, or requiring affirmative action based on, race, creed, color, national origin, age, sex, or other prohibited classification, including, without limitation, the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, 42 U.S.C. §§ 12101 et seq., the Illinois Human Rights Act, 775 ILCS 5/1-101 et seq., and the Public Works Discrimination Act, 775 ILCS 10/0.01 et seq.; and any statutes regarding safety or the performance of the Work, including the Illinois Underground Utility Facilities Damage Prevention Act, 220 ILCS 50/1 et seq., and the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970, 29 U.S.C. §§ 651 et seq. B. Liability for Fines, Penalties. Contractor is solely liable for any fines or civil penalties that are imposed by any governmental or quasi -governmental agency or body that may arise, or be alleged to have arisen, out of or in connection with Contractor's, or its subcontractors' or suppliers', performance of, or failure to perform, the Work or any part thereof. C. Prevailing Wage Act. Contractor and each subcontractor, in order to comply with the Prevailing Wage Act, 820 ILCS 130/0.01 et seq. (the "Act'), must submit to the Village a -17- CONTRACT certified payroll on a monthly basis, in accordance with Section 5 of the Act. The certified payroll must consist of a complete copy of those records required to be made and kept by the Act. The certified payroll must be accompanied by a statement signed by the contractor or subcontractor that certifies that (1) such records are true and accurate, (2) the hourly rate paid is not less than the general prevailing rate of hourly wages required by the Act, and (3) the contractor or subcontractor is aware that filing a certified payroll that he or she knows to be false is a Class B misdemeanor. Contractor may rely on the certification of a subcontractor, provided that Contractor does not knowingly rely on a subcontractor's false certification. On two business days' notice, Contractor and each subcontractor must make available for inspection the records required to be made and kept by the Act (i) to the Village and its officers and agents and to the Director of the Illinois Department of Labor and his or her deputies and agents and (ii) at all reasonable hours at a location within the State. D. Required Provisions Deemed Inserted. Every provision of law required by law to be inserted into this Contract is deemed to be inserted herein. 7.12 Compliance with Patents A. Assumption of Costs, Royalties, and Fees. Contractor will pay or cause to be paid all costs, royalties, and fees arising from the use on, or the incorporation into, the Work, of patented equipment, materials, supplies, tools, appliances, devices, processes, or inventions. B. Effect of Contractor Being Enjoined. Should Contractor be enjoined from furnishing or using any equipment, materials, supplies, tools, appliances, devices, processes, or inventions supplied or required to be supplied or used under this Contract, Contractor must promptly offer substitute equipment, materials, supplies, tools, appliances, devices, processes, or inventions in lieu thereof, of equal efficiency, quality, suitability, and market value, for review by Owner. If Owner should disapprove the offered substitutes and should elect, in lieu of a substitution, to have supplied, and to retain and use, any such equipment, materials, supplies, tools, appliances, devices, processes, or inventions as may by this Contract be required to be supplied, Contractor must pay such royalties and secure such valid licenses as may be requisite and necessary for Owner to use such equipment, materials, supplies, tools, appliances, devices, processes, or inventions without being disturbed or in any way interfered with by any proceeding in law or equity on account thereof. Should Contractor neglect or refuse to make any approved substitution promptly, or to pay such royalties and secure such licenses as may be necessary, then Owner will have the right to make such substitution, or Owner may pay such royalties and secure such licenses and charge the cost thereof against any money due Contractor from Owner or recover the amount thereof from Contractor and its surety or sureties notwithstanding that Final Payment may have been made. 7.13 Time The Contract Time is of the essence of this Contract. Except where otherwise stated, references in this Contract to days is construed to refer to calendar days. -18- CONTRACT 7.14 Severability The provisions of this Contract will be interpreted when possible to sustain their legality and enforceability as a whole. In the event any provision of this Contract is held invalid, illegal, or unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction, in whole or in part, neither the validity of the remaining part of such provision, nor the validity of any other provisions of this Contract will be in any way affected thereby. 7.15 Entire Agreement This Contract sets forth the entire agreement of Owner and Contractor with respect to the accomplishment of the Work and the payment of the Contract Price therefor, and there are no other understandings or agreements, oral or written, between Owner and Contractor with respect to the Work and the compensation therefor. 7.16 Amendments No modification, addition, deletion, revision, alteration or other change to this Contract is effective unless and until such change is reduced to writing and executed and delivered by Owner and Contractor. [SIGNATURE PAGE FOLLOWS] 19- IN WITNESS WHEREOF, Owner and Contractor have caused this Contract to be executed by their property authorized representatives in two original counterparts as of the Effective Date. Attest: By: Name: Title: By: Name: Title: Attest: By: Name: Title: -20- fA' SUPPLEMENTAL SCHEDULE OF CONTRACT TERMS [Check applicable boxes and insert required information.] 1. Proiect: Provide and install all materials needed for the Electrical Systems Upgrade as shown on the drawings and described herein. The general contractor shall provide and install all materials, unless noted otherwise. 2. Work Site: 1200 Oak Brook Road, Oak Brook, Illinois 60523. 3. Permits, Licenses, Approvals, and Authorizations: Contractor must obtain all required governmental permits, licenses, approvals, and authorizations. 4. Commencement Date: Commencement Date shall be mutually agreed upon by Owner and Contractor. Owner anticipates work to begin in March 2017. 5. Completion Date: Completion Date shall be mutually agreed upon by Owner and Contractor. The Completion Date will be subject to equitable adjustment if the Commencement Date is delayed pursuant to Subsection 2.2A of the Contract. 6. Insurance Coverage: Certificates of Insurance shall be presented to Owner within fifteen (15) days after the receipt by the Contractor of the Notice of Award and the unexecuted contract, it being understood and agreed that the Owner will not approve and execute the Contract until acceptable insurance certificates are received and approved by Owner. Each contractor performing any work pursuant to a contract with Owner and each permittee working under a permit as required pursuant to the provisions of Title 1 of -1- ATTACHMENT A Chapter 8 of the Code of Ordinances of the Village of Oak Brook (hereinafter referred to as "Insured") shall be required to carry such insurance as specified herein. Such contractor and permittee shall procure and maintain for the duration of the contract or permit insurance against claims for injuries to persons or damages to property which may arise from or in connection with the performance of the work under the contract or permit, either by the contractor, permittee, or their agents, representatives, employees or subcontractors. A contractor or permittee shall maintain insurance with limits no less than: A. General Liability - $2,000,000 combined single limit per occurrence for bodily injury, personal injury and property damage, provided that when the estimated cost of the work in question does not exceed $25,000, the required limit shall be $1,000,000; B. Automobile Liability (if applicable) - $1,000,000 combined single limit per accident for bodily injury and property damage; C. Worker's Compensation and Employer's Liability - Worker's Compensation limits as required by the Labor Code of the State of Illinois and Employer's Liability limits of $1,000,000 per accident. Any deductibles or self-insured retention must be declared to and approved by Owner. At the option of Owner, either the insurer shall reduce or eliminate such deductible or self- insured retention as respect to Owner, its officers, officials, employees and volunteers; or the Insured shall procure a bond guaranteeing payment of losses and related investigations, claim administration and defense expenses to the extent of such deductible or self-insured retention. The policies shall contain, or be endorsed to contain, the following provisions: D. General Liability and Automobile Liability Coverage - (1) The Owner, its officers, officials, employees and volunteers are to be covered as additional insureds as respects: liability arising out of activities performed by or on behalf of the Insured; premises owned, occupied or used by the Insured. The coverage shall contain no special limitations on the scope of protection afforded to the Owner, its officers, officials, employees, volunteers, or agents. (2) The Insured's insurance coverage shall be primary insurance as respect to the Owner, its officers, officials, employees, volunteers and agents. Any insurance or self-insurance maintained by the Owner, its officers, officials, employees, volunteers or agents shall be in excess of the Insured's insurance and shall not contribute with it. -2- ATTACHMENT A (3) Any failure to comply with reporting provisions of the policies shall not affect coverage provided to the Owner, its officers, officials, employees, volunteers or agents. (4) The Insured's insurance shall apply separately to each covered party against whom claim is made or suit is brought except with respect to the limits of the insurer's liability. E. Worker's Compensation and Employer's Liability Coverage The policy shall waive all rights of subrogation against the Owner, its officers, officials, employees, volunteers and agents for losses arising from work performed by the insured for the Owner. Each insurance policy shall be endorsed to state that coverage shall not be suspended, voided, canceled by either party, reduced in coverage or in limits except after thirty (30) days prior written notice by certified mail has been given to Owner. Each insurance policy shall name the Owner, its officers, officials and employees, volunteers and agents as Additional Insureds. Insurance is to be placed with insurers with a Best's rating of no less than A: VII. Each Insured shall furnish the Owner with certificates of insurance and with original endorsements effecting coverage required by this provision. The certificate and endorsements for each insurance policy are to be signed by a person authorized by that insurer to bind coverage on its behalf. The certificates and endorsements are to be on forms approved by the Owner and shall be subject to approval by the Village Attorney before work commences. The Owner reserves the right to require complete, certified copies of all required insurance policies, at any time. Each insured shall include all subcontractors as insureds under its policies or shall furnish separate certificates and endorsements for each subcontractor. All coverages for subcontractors shall be subject to all of the requirements stated herein. ❑ D. Builders Risk Insurance. This insurance must be written in completed value form, must protect Contractor and Owner against "all risks" of direct physical loss to buildings, structures, equipment, and materials to be used in providing, performing, and completing the Work, including without limitation fire extended coverage, vandalism and malicious mischief, sprinkler leakage, flood, earth movement and collapse, and must be designed for the circumstances that may affect the Work. This insurance must be written with limits not less than the insurable value of the Work at completion. The insurable value must include the aggregate value of Owner -furnished equipment and materials to be constructed or installed by Contractor. -3- ATTACHMENT A This insurance must include coverage while equipment or materials are in warehouses, during installation, during testing, and after the Work is completed, but prior to Final Payment. This insurance must include coverage while Owner is occupying all or any part of the Work prior to Final Payment without the need for the insurance company s consent. ❑ E. Owner's and Contractor's Protective Liability Insurance. Contractor, at its sole cost and expense, must purchase this Insurance in the name of Owner with a combined single limit for bodily injury and property damage of not less than $1,000,000. 114 F. Umbrella Policy. The required coverage may be in the form of an umbrella policy above $2,000,000 primary coverage. All umbrella policies must provide excess coverage over underlying insurance on a following -form basis so that, when any loss covered by the primary policy exceeds the limits under the primary policy, the excess or umbrella policy becomes effective to cover that loss. ❑ G. Deductible. Each policy must have a deductible or self-insured retention of not more than $ H. Owner as Additional Insured. Owner must be named as an Additional Insured on the following policies: General Liability The Additional Insured endorsement must identify Owner as follows: The Village of Oak Brook and its boards, commissions, committees, authorities, employees, agencies, officers, voluntary associations, and other units operating under the jurisdiction and within the appointment of its budget. I. Other Parties as Additional Insureds. In addition to Owner, the following parties must be named as additional insured on the following policies: Additional Insured Policy or Policies Kluber Architects & Engineers -4- ATTACHMENT A Contract Price: SCHEDULE OF PRICES A. LUMP SUM CONTRACT 1. For providing, performing, and completing all Work, the total Contract Price of (write in numbers): $ 426,678.00 In words: Four Hundred and Twenty Six Thousand Six Hundred and Seventy Eight 8. Progress Payments: A. General. Owner must pay to Contractor 90 percent of the Value of Work, determined in the manner set forth below, installed and complete in place up to the day before the Pay Request, less the aggregate of all previous Progress Payments. The total amount of Progress Payments made prior to Final Acceptance by Owner may not exceed 90 percent of the Contract Price. B. Value of Work. The Value of the Work will be determined as follows: (1) Lump Sum Items. For all Work to be paid on a lump sum basis, Contractor must, not later than 10 days after execution of the Contract and before submitting its first Pay Request, submit to Owner a schedule showing the value of each component part of such Work in form and with substantiating data acceptable to Owner ("Breakdown Schedule'). The sum of the items listed in the Breakdown Schedule must equal the amount or amounts set forth in the Schedule of Prices for Lump Sum Work. An unbalanced Breakdown Schedule providing for overpayment of Contractor on component parts of the Work to be performed first will not be accepted. The Breakdown Schedule must be revised and resubmitted until acceptable to Owner. No payment may be made for any lump sum item until Contractor has submitted, and Owner has approved, an acceptable Breakdown Schedule. Owner may require that the approved Breakdown Schedule be revised based on developments occurring during the provision and performance of the Work. If Contractor fails to submit a revised Breakdown Schedule that is acceptable to Owner, Owner will have the right either to suspend Progress and Final Payments for Lump Sum Work or to make such Payments based on Owner's determination of the value of the Work completed. -5- ATTACHMENT A (2) Unit Price Items. For all Work to be paid on a unit price basis, the value of such Work will be determined by Owner on the basis of the actual number of acceptable units of Unit Price Items installed and complete in place, multiplied by the applicable Unit Price set forth in the Schedule of Prices. The actual number of acceptable units installed and complete in place will be measured on the basis described in Attachment B to the Contract or, in the absence of such description, on the basis determined by Owner. The number of units of Unit Price Items stated in the Schedule of Prices are Owner's estimate only and may not be used in establishing the Progress or Final Payments due Contractor. The Contract Price will be adjusted to reflect the actual number of acceptable units of Unit Price Items installed and complete in place upon Final Acceptance. C. Application of Payments. All Progress and Final Payments made by Owner to Contractor will be applied to the payment or reimbursement of the costs with respect to which they were paid and will not be applied to or used for any pre- existing or unrelated debt between Contractor and Owner or between Contractor and any third party. 9. Per Diem Administrative Charge: $500 per day. 10. Standard Specifications: The Contract also includes Owner's Village Code and Building Codes. References to any of these codes means the latest editions effective on the date of the bid opening. See Attachment D for any special project requirements. ®. ATTACHMENT B SPECIFICATIONS -I- SECTION 00 0101 PROJECT TITLE PAGE PROJECT MANUAL 1410 VILLAGE OF OAK BROOK - ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS UPGRADES 1200 OAK BROOK ROAD OAK BROOK, IL 60523-2255 VILLAGE OF OAK BROOK 1200 OAK BROOK ROAD OAK BROOK, IL 60523.2255 ARCHITECT/ENGINEER KLUBER ARCHITECTS + ENGINEERS G [r�� F-9.19 i51'�'IJ lJ�l S I BATAVIA, ILLINOIS 60510 END OF DOCUMENT PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 00 01 01 -1 DOCUMENT 00 01 01 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved PROJECT TITLE PAGE SECTION 00 0107 SEALS PAGE 1.01 DESIGN PROFESSIONALS' SEALS A. ARCHITECT B. STRUCTURAL ENGINEER C. MECHANICAL ENGINEER D. ELECTRICAL ENGINEER END OF DOCUMENT PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 00 01 07 -1 DOCUMENT 00 0107 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC., All Rights Reserved SEALS PAGE SECTION 00 0110 TABLE OF CONTENTS PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS PAGES Introductory Information 00 01 01 Project Title Page 1 000107 Seals Page 1 0001 10 Table of Contents 3 0001 15 Drawing Index 1 SPECIFICATIONS PAGES Division 01 -- General Requirements 01 1000 Summary 2 01 3000 Administrative Requirements (1 page attachment) 5 01 4000 Quality Requirements 6 01 4100 Regulatory Requirements 2 01 4200 References 5 01 5000 Temporary Facilities and Controls 3 01 57 13 Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control 7 01 6000 Product Requirements (1 page attachment) 4 01 7000 Execution and Closeout Requirements 9 01 7700 Closeout Procedures 2 01 7800 Closeout Submittals 4 01 7900 Demonstration and Training 3 Division 02 -- Existing Conditions 02 41 00 Demolition 3 Division 03 -- Concrete 031000 Concrete Forming and Accessories 4 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcing 2 03 30 00 Cast -in -Place Concrete 6 Division 04 -- Masonry 04 20 00 Unit Masonry 6 04 72 00 Cast Stone Masonry 4 PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 00 01 10 -1 DOCUMENT 00 0110 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved TABLE OF CONTENTS Division 07 -- Thermal and Moisture Protection 07 92 00 Joint Sealants 2 Division 09 •- Finishes 09 91 13 Exterior Painting 4 Division 23 •- Heating, Ventilating, and Air -Conditioning (HVAC) 2311 13 Facility Fuel -Oil Piping 3 Division 26 -- Electrical 26 05 00 Basic Electrical Requirements 3 26 05 01 Minor Electrical Demolition 2 26 05 02 Electrical Identification 2 260519 Conductors and Devices 8 26 05 29 Supporting Devices 2 26 05 35 Raceways and Boxes 8 26 21 00 Low -Voltage Electrical Service Entrance 4 262413 Service and Distribution 5 26 32 13 Engine Generators 16 26 36 00 Transfer Switches 5 Division 31 -- Earthwork 31 22 00 Grading 3 312316.13 Trenching 4 Division 32 -- Exterior Improvements 32 92 19 Seeding 3 END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 0001 10-2 DOCUMENT 00 01 10 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 00 0115 DRAWING INDEX GENERAL G100 COVER SHEET, GENERAL NOTES, SYMBOLS & DRAWING INDEX ARCHITECTURAL A101 EQUIPMENT WALL DETAILS E010 ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS LIST & PANEL SCHEDULES E100 ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN E300 ELECTRICAL LOWER LEVEL POWER PLAN E310 ELECTRICAL MAIN LEVEL POWER PLAN E630 ELECTRICAL ONE -LINE RISER DIAGRAM & DETAILS END OF DOCUMENT PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 00 01 15 -1 DOCUMENT 00 Ot 15 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved DRAWING INDEX SECTION 0110 00 SUMMARY PART11 GENERAL 1.01 PROJECT A. Project Name: VILLAGE OF OAK BROOK- ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS UPGRADES. B. Owner's Name: Village of Oak Brook. C. Architect/Engineer's Name: Kluber Architects + Engineers. 1.02 CONTRACT DESCRIPTION A. Contract Type: A single prime contract based on a Stipulated Price as described in the Village of Oak Brook Contract for the Construction of Electrical Systems Upgrades Bid Package document. 1.03 DESCRIPTION OF ALTERATIONS WORK A. Scope of demolition and removal work is shown on drawings and specified in Section 02 4100. B. Scope of alterations work is shown on drawings. C. New exterior masonry equipment enclosure and equipment pads. D. Coordination with Commonwealth Edison Company of all efforts to demolish existing service, construction of new service location and de-energization and re-energization of electrical utility for the orderly progress and completion of the work. E. Construction of new electrical service, transfer switch and distribution systems for Village Hall, Public Works and Fire Station electrical distribution systems as indicated and reasonably inferable in the contract documents. F. Construction of Commonwealth Edison Co. primary empty conduit system and utility pad construction in accordance with utility company requirements. G. Construction of optional standby packaged engine generator set at public works electrical distribution. H. Retro -fit of existing Village Hall packaged generator to add remote annunciator panel at locations indicated on the drawings. I. Temporary electrical service for outages that exceed a duration of 12 hours for the continued operation of the village complex. J. Retro -fit of existing Village Hall electrical distribution to eliminate metering and service entrance equipment as generally indicated or reasonably inferable in the contract documents. K. Demolition of existing Village Hall pad -mount utility transformer, service lateral conductors and de -energized Utility primary feeder. L. Restoration of site landscaping due to construction, demolition, excavation and directional boring activities. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 01 10 00 -1 SECTION 0110 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SUMMARY 1.04 OWNER OCCUPANCY A. Owner intends to continue to occupy adjacent portions of the existing building during the entire construction period. B. Cooperate with Owner to minimize conflict and to facilitate Owner's operations. C. Schedule the Work to accommodate Owner occupancy. 1.05 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISES A. Construction Operations: Limited to areas noted on Drawings. B. Provide access to and from site as required by law and by Owner: 1. Emergency Building Exits During Construction: Keep all exits required by code open during construction period; provide temporary exit signs if exit routes are temporarily altered. 2. Do not obstruct roadways, sidewalks, or other public ways without permit. C. Existing building spaces may not be used for storage. D. Utility Outages and Shutdown: 1. Limit disruption of utility services to hours the building is unoccupied. 2. Do not disrupt or shut down life safety systems, including but not limited to fire sprinklers and fire alarm system, without 7 days notice to Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Prevent accidental disruption of utility services to other facilities. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 01 1000-2 SECTION 0110 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SUMMARY SECTION 0130 00 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 7_1ii�t7��1�L1� 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preconstruction meeting. B. Progress meetings. C. Construction progress schedule. D. Submittals for review, information, and project closeout. E. Architect/Engineer-provided CAD files. F. Number of copies of Submittals. G. Submittal procedures. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 0170 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Additional coordination requirements. B. Section 0178 00 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Architect/Engineer will schedule a meeting after Notice of Award. B. Attendance required: 1. Owner. 2. Architect/Engineer. 3. Contractor. C. Agenda: 1. Architect/Engineer will prepare and provide Agenda for this meeting only. D. Architect will provide minutes and distribute copies to all participants for this meeting only. Participants to distribute to other parties as they see required to have. 3.02 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, preside at meetings. B. Attendance Required: 1. Contractor. 2. Owner. 3. Architect/Engineer. 4. Contractor's Superintendent. PROJECT NO, 15-172-1017 01 30 00 -1 SECTION 0130 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS C. Agenda: 1. Review minutes of previous meetings. 2. Review of Work progress. 3. Field observations, problems, and decisions. 4. Identification of problems that impede, or will impede, planned progress. 5. Review of Submittals schedule and status of Submittals. 6. Maintenance of progress schedule. 7. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 8. Planned progress during succeeding work period. 9. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 10.Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 11.0ther business relating to Work. D. Record minutes and distribute copies within 2 days after meeting to participants, with copies to Architect/Engineer, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made. 3.03 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE A. Within 7 days after date of the Agreement, submit preliminary schedule. B. If preliminary schedule requires revision after review, submit revised schedule within 7 days. C. Submit updated schedule with each Application for Payment. 3.04 Submittals FOR REVIEW A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for review: 1. Product data. 2. Shop drawings. 3. Samples for selection. 4. Samples for verification. B. Submit to Architect/Engineer for review for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. C. Samples will be reviewed only for aesthetic, color, or finish selection. D. After review, provide copies and distribute in accordance with Submittal PROCEDURES article below and for record documents purposes described in Section 0178 00 - Closeout Submittals. 3.05 Submittals FOR INFORMATION A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for information: 1. Design data. 2. Certificates. 3. Test reports. 4. Inspection reports. 5. Manufacturer's instructions. 6. Manufacturer's field reports. 7. Other types indicated. PROJECT NO, 15-172-1017 013000-2 SECTION 01 30 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS B. Submit for ArchitecUEngineer's knowledge as contract administrator or for Owner. No action will be taken. 3.06 Submittals FOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Submit Correction Punch List for Substantial Completion. B. Submit Final Correction Punch List for Substantial Completion. C. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them at Project Closeout: 1. Project record documents. 2. Operation and maintenance data. 3. Warranties. 4. Bonds. 5. Other types as indicated. D. Submit for Owner's benefit during and after Project completion. 3.07 ARC HITECTIENGINEER•PROVIDED CAD FILES A. After the execution of the Contract, Architect/Engineer will provide, free of charge, upon receipt of a properly completed and signed request utilizing "Electronic Data Transfer Consent Form" at the end of this Specification Section, CAD files depicting graphic information for the project as follows: 1. Architectural Floor Plans: Column grid, walls, floors, stairs, doors, windows, room numbers, ceiling grid, mechanical diffusers, plumbing fixtures, sprinkler heads (if depicted in Bid Documents) and lights. B. Contractor acknowledges and accepts that the Architectural Floor Plans do not contain structural, mechanical, electrical, plumbing, fire protection and other building systems information depicted in the Bidding Documents. Examples of information not contained in these files include, but are not limited to, title blocks, keynotes, schedules, mechanical ductwork and equipment, electrical device symbols, circuit numbers and home runs, plumbing equipment, piping runs and riser diagrams, and architectural/engineering text or details. No other CAD files, data or information will be provided. C. Only requests from Prime Contractors will be honored. Subcontractors must obtain the files from their respective Prime Contractors. D. In submitting a request, Contractor acknowledges that: 1. Architect/Engineer bears no responsibility for the data or its transmission, 2. Use of the data by the Contractor or his Subcontractors in no way relieves the Contractor of his obligations under the Contract, 3. Contractor is solely liable for any and all claims arising from any and all products generated by the Contractor or its Subcontractors employing the data, 4. Contractor and its Subcontractors have a limited, non-exclusive license to use the data solely in connection with the Work of the Project, and that 5. Architect/Engineer retains all rights, including copyright, to the data. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 01 3000-3 SECTION 01 30 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 3.08 NUMBER OF COPIES OF Submittals A. Electronic Documents: Submit one electronic copy in PDF format; an electronically -marked up file will be returned. Create PDFs at native size and right -side up; illegible files will be rejected. B. Samples: Submit the number specified in individual specification sections; one of which will be retained by Architect/Engineer. 1. After review, produce duplicates. 2. Retained samples will not be returned to Contractor unless specifically so stated. 3.09 Submittal PROCEDURES A. Shop Drawing Procedures: 1. Prepare accurate, drawn -to -scale, original shop drawing documentation by interpreting the Contract Documents and coordinating related Work. 2. Generic, non -project specific information submitted as shop drawings do not meet the requirements for shop drawings. B. Transmit each Submittal with a copy of approved Submittal form. C. Transmit each Submittal with AIA Form G810. D. Sequentially number the transmittal form. Revise Submittals with original number and a sequential alphabetic suffix. E. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent drawing and detail number, and specification section number, as appropriate on each copy. F. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, approval, verification of Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents. G. Deliver Submittals to Architect/Engineer at business address. H. Schedule Submittals to expedite the Project, and coordinate submission of related items. I. For each Submittal for review, allow 20 days excluding delivery time to and from the Contractor. J. Clearly identify variations from the Contract Documents. Regardless of the type of variation, Contractor is solely responsible for errors in the field that arise from Submittal variations from the requirements of the Contract Documents if those variations were not expressly noted to specifically identify for and describe to the reviewer the nature of the variation from the Contract Documents. K. Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations that may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work. L. Correlate submitted items with specified products; clearly indicate the specified product that corresponds to each submitted item. M. When options or optional features available for a Product are indicated in a Submittal, and selections for those options/features are indicated in the Contract Documents, identify on the Submittal the selection indicated in the Contract Documents. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 013000-4 SECTION 0130 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS N. Provide space for Contractor and Architect/Engineer review stamps. 0. When revised for resubmission, using clouds, highlights or other means acceptable to the Architect, identify all changes made since previous submission. Resubmittals that do not clearly identify all changes may be delayed and/or returned to the Contractor unreviewed. P. The Contractor is entitled to 1 Resubmittals of any Shop Drawing, Product Data, or Closeout Submittal item rejected by the Architect or returned by the Architect for further action. Thereafter, the Contractor shall pay the cost of all further Architect's reviews of Shop Drawing, Product Data or Closeout Submittal, at a rate of $200.00/hour. Cost of such further reviews will be deducted from the Contract Sum by Change Order. Q. Distribute reviewed Submittals as appropriate. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply with requirements. R. Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed. S. Submittal reviews may be delayed and/or Submittals may be returned unreviewed for any of the following reasons: 1. Submittals submitted outside the scheduled dates of the Submittal Schedule. 2. Submittals are incomplete or are missing information. 3. Submittals are not submitted in accordance with procedures outlined in this Section (i.e. spec Section number not indicated, missing Contractor's review stamp, submitted items not correlated with specified products). END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 013000-5 SECTION 0130 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC,; All Rights Reserved ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Kluber Architects + Engineers ELECTRONIC DATA TRANSFER CONSENT FORM Project: Village of Oak Brook Electrical Systems Upgrades 1200 Oak Brook Road Oak Brook, IL 60523 Kluber Project: 15-172-1017 Owner: Village of Oak Brook KLUBER, INC., an Illinois corporation, is providing electronic data to you solely at your request and for your convenience. By accepting and opening any of the electronic data files, you agree that Kluber, Inc. bears no liability for the data or its transmission to you and that you are solely liable for any and all claims referring or relating to any and all products you, or your Subcontractors, may generate with the data. You acknowledge that you have a limited non-exclusive license to use the information solely in connection with your work on the project captioned above, and that Kluber, Inc. retains all rights, including copyright, to the data. Acknowledged by: Company: Date: (Printed Name) (Signature) Email: Architectural Floor Plans are transmitted for the contractors' use as backgrounds for shop drawings and as -built drawings, and, as such, contain graphic information for column grid, walls, floors, stairs, doors, windows, room numbers, ceiling grid, lights, receptacles, diffusers and sprinkler heads where indicated on Bid Documents. Plans do not contain title blocks, keynotes, schedules, mechanical ductwork and equipment, electrical device symbols, circuit numbers and home runs, plumbing equipment, piping runs and riser diagrams, and architectural/engineering text and details. Plans depict entire floors and are not formatted, partial plans as depicted in the Bidding Documents. Files are provided in R2000 .DWG format.) SECTION 0140 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Quality assurance. B. Sequencing and scheduling of the work with testing and inspections. C. Testing and inspection agencies and services. D. Control of installation. E. Tolerances. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 014100 - Regulatory Requirements, B. Section 0142 00 - References. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C1021 - Standard Practice for Laboratories Engaged in Testing of Building Sealants; 2008 (Reapproved 2014). B. ASTM C1077 - Standard Practice for Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation; 2014. C. ASTM C1093 - Standard Practice for Accreditation of Testing Agencies for Masonry; 2013. D. ASTM D3740 - Standard Practice for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction; 2012a. E. ASTM E329 - Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection and/or Testing; 2014a. F. ASTM E543 - Standard Specification for Agencies Performing Nondestructive Testing; 2013. G. ASTM El 155 - Standard Test Method for Determining F(F) Floor Flatness and F(L) Floor Levelness Numbers; 1996 (Reapproved 2008). H. ASTM C39/C39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens; 2010. I. ASTM C109/C109M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2 -in. or (50 -mm) Cube Specimens); 2008. J. ASTM C1431C143M - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic -Cement Concrete; 2010a. K. ASTM C173/C173M - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method; 2010b. L. ASTM C67 - Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural Clay Tile; 2009. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 01 40 00 -1 SECTION 0140 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved QUALITY REQUIREMENTS M. ASTM C14O - Standard Test Methods of Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units and Related Units; 2011. N. ASTM C78O - Standard Test Method for Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry; 2010. 0. ASTM C1148 - Standard Test Method for Measuring the Drying Shrinkage of Masonry Mortar; 1992a (Reapproved 2008). P. ASTM C1314 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Masonry Prisms; 2010. Q. ASTM C1357 - Standard Test Methods for Evaluating Masonry Bond Strength; 2009. R. ASTM E514 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration and Leakage Through Masonry ; 2009. S. ASTM E165 - Standard Test Method for Liquid Penetrant Examination; 2009. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Design Data: Submit for ArchitecUEngineer's knowledge as contract administrator for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents, or for Owner's information. C. Test Reports: After each test/inspection, promptly submit two copies of report to Architect/Engineer and to Contractor. 1. Include: a. Date issued. b. Project title and number. c. Name of inspector. d. Date and time of sampling or inspection. e. Identification of product and specifications section. f. Location in the Project. g. Type of test/inspection. h. Date of test/inspection. I. Results of tesUinspection. j. Conformance with Contract Documents. k. When requested by ArchitecUEngineer, provide interpretation of results. Certificates: When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by the manufacturer and Contractor or installation/application subcontractor to ArchitecUEngineer, in quantities specified for Product Data. 1. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. E. Manufacturer's Instructions: When specified in individual specification sections, submit printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, for the Owner's information. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and special environmental criteria required for application or installation. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 014000-2 SECTION 0140 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS -See Section 014100 1.06 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS - See Section 0142 00 1.07 TESTING AND INSPECTION AGENCIES AND SERVICES A. Owner will employ and pay for services of an independent testing agency to perform specified testing and inspection, except where specifically indicated otherwise in the Schedule of Tests and Inspections. B. Employment of agency in no way relieves Contractor of obligation to perform Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. C. Contractor Employed Agency: 1. Testing agency: Comply with requirements of ASTM E329, ASTM E543, ASTM C1021, ASTM C1077, ASTM C1093, and ASTM D3740. 2. Inspection agency: Comply with requirements of ASTM D3740 and ASTM E329. 1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Soils Testing: As each portion of the Work is completed, notify testing laboratory to perform compaction and moisture density tests. 1. Test compaction of existing and placed materials no more than seven (7) days prior to placement of the next portion of the Work, and only when no rain is expected between the time of the test and the placement of the next portion of the Work. 2. Proceed promptly with additional portions of the Work only after satisfactory results have been verified in writing. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality. B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence. C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect/Engineer before proceeding. D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. E. Have Work performed by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality. F. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the manufacturer. G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion, and disfigurement. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 014000-3 SECTION 0140 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 3.02 TOLERANCES A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate. B. Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. Should manufacturers' tolerances conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect/Engineer before proceeding. C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place. 3.03 TESTING AND INSPECTION A. Testing Agency Duties: 1. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Architect/Engineer and Contractor in performance of services. 2. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified standards. 3. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents. 4. Promptly notify Architect/Engineer and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-conformance of Work or products. 5. Perform additional tests and inspections required by Architect/Engineer. 6. Submit reports of all tests/inspections specified. B. Limits on Testing/Inspection Agency Authority: 1. Agency may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Agency may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3. Agency may not assume any duties of Contractor. 4. Agency has no authority to stop the Work. C. Contractor Responsibilities: 1. Deliver to agency at designated location, adequate samples of materials proposed to be used that require testing, along with proposed mix designs. 2. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work and to manufacturers' facilities. 3. Provide incidental labor and facilities: a. To provide access to Work to be tested/inspected. b. To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be tested/inspected. c. To facilitate tests/inspections. d. To provide storage and curing of test samples. 4. Notify Architect/Engineer and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring testing/inspection services. 5. Employ services of an independent qualified testing laboratory and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements. 6. Arrange with Owner's agency and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements. D. Re -testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by the same agency on instructions by Architect/Engineer. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 014000-4 SECTION 0140 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved QUALITY REQUIREMENTS E. Re -testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be paid for by Contractor. 3.04 SCHEDULE OF TESTS AND INSPECTIONS: A. Concrete Testing and Inspection: Owner's Testing Service. 1. Section 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing: a. Inspect reinforcement for bar size, quantity, cover and support prior to casting concrete. 2. Section 03 30 00 - Cast -in -Place Concrete: a. Compressive strength tests: ASTM C172 and ASTM C39. a) Samples for each day's pour greater than 5 cubic yards. Sample every 50 cubic yards. b) Sample shall consist of 4 specimens. Break schedule: 1 at 7 days, 2 at 28 days and final held for possible future break if directed by ArchitecUEngineer. c) Slump: ASTM C 143; one for each set of test cylinders. d) Air Content: ASTM C 231. e) Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064. f) Unit Weight: ASTM C 567. g) Take one additional cylinder during cold weather, cured on site under same conditions as the concrete it represents. b. Measure F(F) and F(L) in accordance with ASTM El 155, within 48 hours after slab installation; report both composite overall values and local values for each measured section. B. Masonry Testing and Inspection: Owner's Testing Service. 1. Section 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry: a. Masonry mortar tests: ASTM C 270. b. Masonry grout tests: ASTM C 1019. c. Inspect masonry anchorage and reinforcement for placement, bar size, quantity, spacing, and lap lengths. d. Masonry Assemblies: Tested in accordance with the provisions of ACI 530.11ASCE6/TMS 602. C. Soils Testing: Owner's Testing Service. 1. Section 31 2316 - Excavation, Section 3123 16.13 - Trenching, Section 3123 23 - Fill, and Section 32 11 23 Aggregate Base Courses: a. Test and inspect subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. b. Building pad and footing subgrades to verify design bearing capacities. Perform testing in accordance with project soils report. c. Test compaction of soils ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937 as applicable. d. Paved and building slab areas subgrade at least one test for every 2,500 square feet. e. Foundation backfill compaction of initial and final layer. Perform at least one test every 200 feet. 3.05 DEFECT ASSESSMENT A. Test Results: The testing agency shall report test results in writing to Architect and Contractor within 24 hours of test. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 014000-5 SECTION 0140 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved QUALITY REQUIREMENTS B. If, in the opinion of Owner, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, Owner will direct an appropriate remedy or adjust payment. END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 014000-6 SECTION 0140 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved QUALITY REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01 41 00 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. General, B. Definitions. C. Quality Assurance. D. Regulatory Requirements. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 10 00 -Summary. B. Section 0142 00 - References. 1.03 GENERAL A. Comply with all applicable laws, rules, regulations, codes and ordinances. B. If the Contractor observes that the Contract Documents may be at variance with specified codes, notify the Architect/Engineer immediately. Architect/Engineer shall issue all changes in accordance with the General Conditions. C. It shall not be the Contractor's primary responsibility to make certain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with all applicable laws, rules and regulations, however, when the Contractor performs work knowing or having reason to know that the work in question is contrary to applicable laws, rules, and regulations, and fails to notify the Architect/Engineer, the Contractor shall pay all costs arising therefrom. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Definitions: 1. Codes: Codes are statutory requirements, rules or regulations of governmental entities. 2. Standards: Standards are requirements that have been established as accepted criteria, set general consent. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The Architect/Engineer has designed the project to applicable code requirements and has copies of said codes available for the Contractor's inspection. B. The Contractor shall: 1. Ensure that copies of codes and standards referenced herein or specified in individual specifications sections are available to Contractor's personnel, agents, and Sub -Contractors. 2. Ensure that Contractor's personnel, agents, and Sub -Contractors are familiar with the workmanship and requirements of applicable codes and standards. PROJECT NO, 15-172-1017 01 41 00 -1 SECTION 01 41 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 1.66 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Source and Requirements: Verify amendments with local code officials. 1. Local code requirements: a. ICC International Building Code, 2009 Edition. b. ICC International Mechanical Code, 2009 Edition. c. ICC International Fire Code, 2009 Edition. d. ICC International Property Maintenance Code, 2009 Edition. e. ICC Electrical Code, 2000 Edition. 2. State code requirements: a. Capital Development Board (CDB): Illinois Accessibility Code, 1997 Edition. b. Illinois Department of Labor (IDOL): Safety Glazing Materials Act - Illinois Revised Statutes, chap. 111 1/2, paragraph 3101, et seq. c. Illinois Department of Public Health (IDPH): a) Illinois Plumbing Code (Illinois Administrative Code, Title 77, Chapter I, Subchapter r, Part 890). d. Illinois Environmental Protection Agency (TEPA): a) Air -Pollution Standards. b) Noise Pollution Standards. c) Water Pollution Standards. d) Public Water Supplies e) Solid Waste Standards. f) Illinois Recommended Standards for Sewage Work. e. Illinois State Fire Marshal (OSFM): a) Boiler & Pressure Vessel Safety Code (Illinois Administrative Code, Title 44, Chapter I, Part 120). b) Illinois Rules & Regulations for Fire Prevention & Safety (as amended). c) Gasoline and Volatile Oils (Illinois Revised Statutes, chap. 171/2, paragraph 31, et seq.). 3. Information and Requirements for Utility Services: Local utility companies. PART PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 014100-2 SECTION 01 41 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS SECTION 0142 00 REFERENCES I T1111fltl4il47_1A 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Drawing symbols, abbreviations and acronyms. B. Definitions of terms used throughout the Contract Documents. C. Explanation of specification format and content. D. Requirements relating to referenced standards. E. Applicability of referenced standards. F. List of industry organizations and certain of their respective documents. 1.02 DRAWING SYMBOLS AND CONVENTIONS A. Abbreviations and graphic symbols are defined on the General Notes, Symbols & Abbreviations sheet of the drawings. B. Generally, symbols used on the mechanical and electrical drawings conform to those recommended by ASHRAE, though, where appropriate, these symbols are supplemented by more specific symbols as recommended by ASME, ASPE, or the IEEE. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Where the terms "indicated", "noted", "scheduled", "shown", or "specified" are used it is to help locate the reference; no limitation on location is intended except as specifically noted. B. Where the terms "directed", "requested", "authorized", "approved", are used as in "directed by the Architect/Engineer", no implied meaning shall be construed to extend the Architect/Engineer's responsibilities into the Contractor's purview of construction supervision. C. Where the term "approved" is used in conjunction with the Architect/Engineer's action on submittals, requests or applications it is limited to the duties of the Architect/Engineer as described in the Agreement, and the General and Supplemental Conditions of the Contract. Such use of the term "approval" shall not limit or release the Contractor from his responsibility to fulfill Contract requirements. D. Where the term "regulations" is used it means all applicable statutes, laws, ordinances, and orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, as well as construction industry standards, rules, or conventions that address performance of the Work. E. Where the term "furnish" is used it means supply, deliver, and unload to the construction site ready for assembly and incorporation into the Work. F. Where the term "install" is used it is meant to describe operations at the job site to include unloading, assembling, placing, anchoring, finishing, protecting, cleaning and all other similar operations required to fully incorporate an item into the Work. G. Where the term "provide" is used it means "furnish and install" as defined above. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 01 42 00 -1 SECTION 0142 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved REFERENCES H. The "Project Site" is the space available to the Contractor for performance of construction activities. The Project Site may be for the exclusive use of the Contractor and his activities or may be used in conjunction with others with others performing other construction or related activities on the Project. The Extent of the Project Site is indicated on the drawings. 1.04 SPECIFICATION FORMAT AND CONTENT A. These Specifications are based on the Construction Specification Institute's 49 Division format and numbering system. B. Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is an abbreviated type. Implied words and meanings will appropriately interpreted. C. Requirements expressed in imperative and streamlined language are to be performed by the Contractor. At certain locations in the text, subjective language may be used to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by the Contractor or others. 1. Whenever a colon (:) us used within a sentence or phrase, it shall be construed to mean the words "shall be". D. Use of certain terms such as "carpentry" is not intended to imply that certain activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name. The Specifications do, however, require that certain construction activities shall be performed by specialists who are recognized experts in the operations to be performed. Specialists shall be used for said activities, however the final responsibility for fulfilling the requirements of the Contract remains the Contractor's. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. For products or workmanship specified by reference to a document or documents not included in the Project Manual, also referred to as reference standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. B. Conform to reference standard of date of issue specified in this section, except where a specific date is established by applicable code. C. Obtain copies of standards when required by the Contract Documents. D. Maintain copy at project site during submittals, planning, and progress of the specific work, until Substantial Completion. E. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from the Architect/Engineer before proceeding. F. Neither the contractual relationships, duties, or responsibilities of the parties in Contract nor those of the Architect/Engineer shall be altered by the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document. 1.06 APPLICABILITY OF INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Construction industry standards shall have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly in the Contract Documents, except where more stringent requirements are specified. All such applicable standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. PROJECT N0, 15-172-1017 014200-2 SECTION 0142 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved REFERENCES 1. Where compliance with two or more standards are referenced and conflicting requirements for quality or quantities occur, comply with the more stringent requirements. Refer questions regarding apparently conflicting standards to the Architect for a decision before proceeding. 2. The standard of quality or quantity levels specified, shown, or referenced shall be the minimum to be provided or performed. Refer questions regarding standards of minimum quality or quantity to the Architect before proceeding. 1.07 CONSTRUCTION INDUSTRY ORGANIZATIONS AND DOCUMENTS A. AA --ALUMINUM ASSOCIATION, INC. B. AABC -- ASSOCIATED AIR BALANCE COUNCIL C. AAMA -- AMERICAN ARCHITECTURAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION D. AASHTO -- AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS E. ACI --AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE INTERNATIONAL F. AISC -- AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INC. G. ANSI --AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE H. ASHRAE -- AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING ENGINEERS, INC. I. ASME -- THE AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS 1. ASME A17.1 - Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators; 2004. J. ASTM -- AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS K. AWI — ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK INSTITUTE L. AWPA -- AMERICAN WOOD -PRESERVERS' ASSOCIATION M. AWS -- AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY N. BHMA -- BUILDERS HARDWARE MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION 0. BIA -- BRICK INDUSTRY ASSOCIATION P. CPSC — CONSUMER PRODUCTS SAFETY COMMISSION Q. DHI -- DOOR AND HARDWARE INSTITUTE R. DIN -- DEUTSCHES INSTITUT FUR NORMUNG S. FM — FACTORY MUTUAL RESEARCH CORPORATION T. ICC -- INTERNATIONAL CODE COUNCIL, INC. U. IEEE — INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC ENGINEERS V. ISO -- INTERNATIONAL STANDARDS ORGANIZATION W. MFMA -- MAPLE FLOORING MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 014200-3 SECTION 0142 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved REFERENCES X. NAAMM -- THE NATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF ARCHITECTURAL METAL MANUFACTURERS Y. NCMA -- NATIONAL CONCRETE MASONRY ASSOCIATION Z. NEBB -- NATIONAL ENVIRONMENTAL BALANCING BUREAU AA. NEMA -- NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION AB. NFPA — NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION AC. NRCA -- NATIONAL ROOFING CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION AD. PCI -- PRECAST/PRESTRESSED CONCRETE INSTITUTE AE. SDI -- STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE AF. SDI -- STEEL DECK INSTITUTE, INC. AG. SGCC -- SAFETY GLAZING CERTIFICATION COUNCIL AH. SIGMA - SEALED INSULATING GLASS MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (See IGMA) Al. SJI -- STEEL JOIST INSTITUTE AJ.SMACNA — SHEET METAL AND AIR CONDITIONING CONTRACTORS' NATIONAL ASSOCIATION, INC. AK. SSPC — THE SOCIETY FOR PROTECTIVE COATINGS AL. TCA --TILE COUNCIL OF AMERICA, INC. AM. UL -- UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES INC. AN. USG -- UNITED STATES GYPSUM 1. USG (HB) - Gypsum Construction Handbook; Seventh Edition, A0. WWPA -- WESTERN WOOD PRODUCTS ASSOCIATION 1.08 UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT AND RELATED AGENCIES/DOCUMENTS A. CFR -- CODE OF FEDERAL REGULATIONS B. CPSC -- CONSUMER PRODUCTS SAFETY COMMISSION C. EPA -- ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY D. FS -- FEDERAL SPECIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS (General Services Administration) E. GSA — U.S. GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION F. USGS -- UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY 1.09 STATE GOVERNMENT AND RELATED AGENCIES/DOCUMENTS A. CDB -- ILLINOIS CAPITAL DEVELOPMENT BOARD B. IDOL -- ILLINOIS DEPARTMENT OF LABOR C. IDPH — ILLINOIS DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC HEALTH PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 014200-4 SECTION 0142 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved REFERENCES D. IEPA - ILLINOIS ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY E. OSFM -- OFFICE OF THE ILLINOIS STATE FIRE MARSHAL. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION • NOT USED END OF SECTION PROJECT N0. 15-172-1017 014200-5 SECTION 0142 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved REFERENCES SECTION 0150 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART1 GENERAL ill9iilE� ��i i I�]il P.[�3�117 �1 A. Temporary utilities. B. Temporary telecommunications services. C. Temporary sanitary facilities. D. Temporary Controls: Barriers, enclosures, and fencing. E. Security requirements. F. Vehicular access and parking. G. Waste removal facilities and services. 1.02 TEMPORARY UTILITIES - See Section 01 51 00 A. Owner will provide the following: 1. Electrical power and metering, consisting of connection to existing facilities. 2. Water supply, consisting of connection to existing facilities. B. Existing facilities may be used. C. Use trigger -operated nozzles for water hoses, to avoid waste of water. IKIIM144411I0]1M1111ilily-IN IIoilE &l4:ilrlIs] *1 A. Provide, maintain, and pay for telecommunications services to field office at time of project mobilization. B. Telecommunications services shall include: 1. One (1) mobile cellular telephone for each of Contractor's and any Subcontractor's field personnel. 2. Email: Account/address reserved for project use. fiKIIIi14i`1IZ#]XJZ &Y-1111iT1 7Z11113AIIIr*1 A. Use of existing facilities is permitted. B. Maintain daily in clean and sanitary condition. C. At end of construction, return facilities to same or better condition as originally found. 1.05 BARRIERS A. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas, to prevent access to areas that could be hazardous to workers or the public, to allow for owner's use of site and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations and demolition. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 01 50 00 -1 SECTION 0150 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS B. Provide barricades and covered walkways required by governing authorities for public rights-of-way . C. Provide protection for plants designated to remain. Replace damaged plants. D. Protect non -owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site, and structures from damage. 1.06 FENCING A. Construction: Commercial grade chain link fence. B. Provide 6 foot high fence around construction site; equip with vehicular and pedestrian gates with locks. 1.07 EXTERIOR ENCLOSURES A. Provide temporary weather tight closure of exterior openings to accommodate acceptable working conditions and protection for Products, to allow for temporary heating and maintenance of required ambient temperatures identified in individual specification sections, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. Provide access doors with self-closing hardware and locks. 1.08 INTERIOR ENCLOSURES A. Provide temporary partitions as indicated to separate work areas from Owner -occupied areas, to prevent penetration of dust and moisture into Owner -occupied areas, and to prevent damage to existing materials and equipment. B. Construction: Framing and reinforced polyethylene sheet materials with closed joints and sealed edges at intersections with existing surfaces: 1.09 SECURITY A. Provide security and facilities to protect Work, existing facilities, and Owner's operations from unauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft. B. Coordinate with Owner's security program. 1.10 VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING A. Comply with regulations relating to use of streets and sidewalks, access to emergency facilities, and access for emergency vehicles. B. Coordinate access and haul routes with governing authorities and Owner. C. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants, free of obstructions. D. Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering streets. E. Existing parking areas may be used for construction parking. 1.11 WASTE REMOVAL A. Provide waste removal facilities and services as required to maintain the site in clean and orderly condition. B. Provide containers with lids. Remove trash from site periodically. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 015000-2 SECTION 0150 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS C. If materials to be recycled or re -used on the project must be stored on-site, provide suitable non-combustible containers; locate containers holding flammable material outside the structure unless otherwise approved by the authorities having jurisdiction. D. Open free -fall chutes are not permitted. Terminate closed chutes into appropriate containers with lids. 1.12 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS A. Remove temporary utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, prior to Substantial Completion inspection. B. Remove underground installations to a minimum depth of 2 feet. Grade site as indicated. C. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work. D. Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition. J -11A J;T*]0143i6B-C9)atfics PART 3 EXECUTION • NOT USED END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 015000-3 SECTION 0150 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS SECTION 0157 13 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Prevention of erosion due to construction activities. B. Prevention of sedimentation of waterways, open drainage ways, and storm and sanitary sewers due to construction activities. C. Restoration of areas eroded due to insufficient preventive measures. D. Compensation of Owner for fines levied by authorities having jurisdiction due to non-compliance by Contractor. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM D4355/D4355M - Standard Test Method for Deterioration of Geotextiles by Exposure to Light, Moisture and Heat in a Xenon Arc Type Apparatus; 2014. B. ASTM D4491 - Standard Test Methods for Water Permeability of Geotextiles by Permittivity; 1999a (Reapproved 2014). C. ASTM D4533 - Standard Test Method for Trapezoid Tearing Strength of Geotextiles; 2011. D. ASTM D4632/D4632M - Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles; 2015a. E. ASTM D4751 - Standard Test Method for Determining Apparent Opening Size of a Geotextile; 2012. F. ASTM D4873 - Standard Guide for Identification, Storage, and Handling of Geosynthetic Rolls and Samples; 2002 (Reapproved 2009). G. EPA (NPDES) - National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES), Construction General Permit; Current Edition. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with all requirements of U.S. Environmental Protection Agency for erosion and sedimentation control, as specified for the National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES), Phases I and ll, under requirements for the 2003 Construction General Permit (CGP), whether the project is required by law to comply or not. B. Develop and follow an Erosion and Sedimentation Prevention Plan and submit periodic inspection reports. C. Do not begin clearing, grading, or other work involving disturbance of ground surface cover until applicable permits have been obtained; furnish all documentation required to obtain applicable permits. 1. Obtain and pay for permits and provide security required by authority having jurisdiction. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 0157 13-1 SECTION 0157 13 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL D. Timing: Put preventive measures in place as soon as possible after disturbance of surface cover and before precipitation occurs. E. Storm Water Runoff: Control increased storm water runoff due to disturbance of surface cover due to construction activities for this project. 1. Prevent runoff into storm and sanitary sewer systems, including open drainage channels, in excess of actual capacity or amount allowed by authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is less. 2. Anticipate runoff volume due to the most extreme short term and 24-hour rainfall events that might occur in 25 years. F. Erosion On Site: Minimize wind, water, and vehicular erosion of soil on project site due to construction activities for this project. 1. Control movement of sediment and soil from temporary stockpiles of soil. 2. Prevent development of ruts due to equipment and vehicular traffic. 3. If erosion occurs due to non-compliance with these requirements, restore eroded areas at no cost to Owner. G. Erosion Off Site: Prevent erosion of soil and deposition of sediment on other properties caused by water leaving the project site due to construction activities for this project. 1. Prevent windblown soil from leaving the project site. 2. Prevent tracking of mud onto public roads outside site. 3. Prevent mud and sediment from flowing onto sidewalks and pavements. 4. If erosion occurs due to non-compliance with these requirements, restore eroded areas at no cost to Owner. H. Sedimentation of Waterways On Site: Prevent sedimentation of waterways on the project site, including rivers, streams, lakes, ponds, open drainage ways, storm sewers, and sanitary sewers. 1. If sedimentation occurs, install or correct preventive measures immediately at no cost to Owner; remove deposited sediments; comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 2. If sediment basins are used as temporary preventive measures, pump dry and remove deposited sediment after each storm. I. Sedimentation of Waterways Off Site: Prevent sedimentation of waterways off the project site, including rivers, streams, lakes, ponds, open drainage ways, storm sewers, and sanitary sewers. 1. If sedimentation occurs, install or correct preventive measures immediately at no cost to Owner; remove deposited sediments; comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. J. Open Water: Prevent standing water that could become stagnant. K. Maintenance: Maintain temporary preventive measures until permanent measures have been established. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for Submittal procedures. B. Erosion and Sedimentation Control Plan: PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 015713-2 SECTION 0157 13 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 1. Submit not less than 30 days prior to anticipated start of clearing, grading, or other work involving disturbance of ground surface cover. 2. Include: a. Site plan identifying soils and vegetation, existing erosion problems, and areas vulnerable to erosion due to topography, soils, vegetation, or drainage. b. Site plan showing grading; new improvements; temporary roads, traffic accesses, and other temporary construction; and proposed preventive measures. c. Where extensive areas of soil will be disturbed, include storm water flow and volume calculations, soil loss predictions, and proposed preventive measures. d. Schedule of temporary preventive measures, in relation to ground disturbing activities. e. Other information required by law. f. Format required by law is acceptable, provided any additional information specified is also included. 3. Obtain the approval of the Plan by authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Obtain the approval of the Plan by Owner. C. Certificate: Mill certificate for silt fence fabric attesting that fabric and factory seams comply with specified requirements, signed by legally authorized official of manufacturer; indicate actual minimum average roll values; identify fabric by roll identification numbers. D. Inspection Reports: Submit report of each inspection; identify each preventive measure, indicate condition, and specify maintenance or repair required and accomplished. PART2 PRODUCTS `�r;il■�iT�i �iL•l�� A. Mulch: Use one of the following: 1. Straw or hay. 2. Erosion control matting or netting. B. Grass Seed For Temporary Cover: Select a species appropriate to climate, planting season, and intended purpose. If same area will later be planted with permanent vegetation, do not use species known to be excessively competitive or prone to volunteer in subsequent seasons. C. Bales: Air dry, rectangular straw bales. 1. Cross Section: 14 by 18 inches, minimum. 2. Bindings: Wire or string, around long dimension. D. Bale Stakes: One of the following, minimum 3 feet long: 1. Steel U- or T -section, with minimum mass of 1.33 Ib per linear foot. 2. Wood, 2 by 2 inches in cross section. E. Silt Fence Fabric: Polypropylene geotextile resistant to common soil chemicals, mildew, and insects; non -biodegradable; in longest lengths possible; fabric including seams with the following minimum average roll lengths: 1. Average Opening Size: 30 U.S. Std. Sieve, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D4751. 2. Permittivity: 0.05 sec^ -1, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D4491. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 01 5713-3 SECTION 0157 13 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 3. Ultraviolet Resistance: Retaining at least 70 percent of tensile strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM D4355 after 500 hours exposure. 4. Tensile Strength: 100 Ib -f, minimum, in cross -machine direction; 124 Ib -f, minimum, in machine direction; when tested in accordance with ASTM D4632. 5, Elongation: 15 to 30 percent, when tested in accordance with ASTM D4632. 6. Tear Strength: 55 Ib -f, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D4533. 7. Color: Manufacturer's standard, with embedment and fastener lines preprinted. Silt Fence Posts: One of the following, minimum 5 feet long: 1. Steel U- or T -section, with minimum mass of 1.33 Ib per linear foot. 2. Softwood, 4 by 4 inches in cross section. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine site and identify existing features that contribute to erosion resistance; maintain such existing features to greatest extent possible. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Schedule work so that soil surfaces are left exposed for the minimum amount of time. 3.03 SCOPE OF PREVENTIVE MEASURES A. In all cases, if permanent erosion resistant measures have been installed temporary preventive measures are not required. B. Construction Entrances: Traffic -bearing aggregate surface. 1. Width: As required; 20 feet, minimum. 2. Length: 50 feet, minimum. 3. Provide at each construction entrance from public right-of-way. 4. Where necessary to prevent tracking of mud onto right-of-way, provide wheel washing area out of direct traffic lane, with drain into sediment trap or basin. C. Linear Sediment Barriers: Made of silt fences. 1. Provide linear sediment barriers: a. Along downhill perimeter edge of disturbed areas, including soil stockpiles. b. Along the top of the slope or top bank of drainage channels and swales that traverse disturbed areas. c. Along the toe of cut slopes and fill slopes. d. Perpendicular to flow across the bottom of existing and new drainage channels and swales that traverse disturbed areas or carry runoff from disturbed areas; space at maximum of 200 feet apart. e. Across the entrances to culverts that receive runoff from disturbed areas. 2. Space sediment barriers with the following maximum slope length upslope from barrier: a. Slope of Less Than 2 Percent: 100 feet. b. Slope Between 2 and 5 Percent: 75 feet. c. Slope Between 5 and 10 Percent: 50 feet. d. Slope Between 10 and 20 Percent: 25 feet. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 015713-4 SECTION 0157 13 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL e. Slope Over 20 Percent: 15 feet. D. Storm Drain Curb Inlet Sediment Trap: Protect each curb inlet using one of the following measures: 1. Filter fabric wrapped around hollow concrete blocks blocking entire inlet face area; use one piece of fabric wrapped at least 1-1/2 times around concrete blocks and secured to prevent dislodging; orient cores of blocks so runoff passes into inlet. 2. Straw bale row blocking entire inlet face area; anchor into pavement. E. Storm Drain Drop Inlet Sediment Traps: As detailed on drawings. F. Temporary Splash Pads: Stone aggregate over filter fabric; size to suit application; provide at downspout outlets and storm water outlets. G. Soil Stockpiles: Protect using one of the following measures: 1. Cover with polyethylene film, secured by placing soil on outer edges. 2. Cover with mulch at least 4 inches thickness of pine needles, sawdust, bark, wood chips, or shredded leaves, or 6 inches of straw or hay. H. Mulching: Use only for areas that may be subjected to erosion for less than 6 months. I. Temporary Seeding: Use where temporary vegetated cover is required. 3.04 INSTALLATION A. Traffic -Bearing Aggregate Surface: 1. Excavate minimum of 6 inches. 2. Place geotextile fabric full width and length, with minimum 12 inch overlap at joints. 3. Place and compact at least 6 inches of 1.5 to 3.5 inch diameter stone. B. Silt Fences: 1. Store and handle fabric in accordance with ASTM D4873. 2. Where slope gradient is less than 3:1 or barriers will be in place less than 6 months, use nominal 16 inch high barriers with minimum 36 inch long posts spaced at 6 feet maximum, with fabric embedded at least 4 inches in ground. 3. Where slope gradient is steeper than 3:1 or barriers will be in place over 6 months, use nominal 28 inch high barriers, minimum 48 inch long posts spaced at 6 feet maximum, with fabric embedded at least 6 inches in ground. 4. Where slope gradient is steeper than 3:1 and vertical height of slope between barriers is more than 20 feet, use nominal 32 inch high barriers with woven wire reinforcement and steel posts spaced at 4 feet maximum, with fabric embedded at least 6 inches in ground. 5. Install with top of fabric at nominal height and embedment as specified. 6. Do not splice fabric width; minimize splices in fabric length; splice at post only, overlapping at least 18 inches, with extra post. 7. Fasten fabric to wood posts using one of the following: a. Four 3/4 inch diameter, 1 inch long, 14 gage nails. b. Five 17 -gage staples with 3/4 inch wide crown and 1/2 inch legs. 8. Fasten fabric to steel posts using wire, nylon cord, or integral pockets. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 015713-5 SECTION 0157 13 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 9. Wherever runoff will flow around end of barrier or over the top, provide temporary splash pad or other outlet protection; at such outlets in the run of the barrier, make barrier not more than 12 inches high with post spacing not more than 4 feet. C. Straw Bale Rows: 1. Install bales in continuous rows with ends butting tightly, with one bale at each end of row turned uphill. 2. Install bales so that bindings are not in contact with the ground. 3. Embed bales at least 4 inches in the ground. 4. Anchor bales with at least two stakes per bale, driven at least 18 inches into the ground; drive first stake in each bale toward the previously placed bale to force bales together. 5. Fill gaps between ends of bales with loose straw wedged tightly. 6. Place soil excavated for trench against bales on the upslope side of the row, compacted. D. Mulching Over Large Areas: 1. Dry Straw and Hay: Apply 2-1/2 tons per acre; anchor using dull disc harrow or emulsified asphalt applied using same spraying machine at 100 gallons of water per ton of mulch. 2. Erosion Control Matting: Comply with manufacturer's instructions. E. Mulching Over Small and Medium Areas: 1. Dry Straw and Hay: Apply 4 to 6 inches depth. 2. Erosion Control Matting: Comply with manufacturer's instructions. Temporary Seeding: 1. When hydraulic seeder is used, seedbed preparation is not required. 2. When surface soil has been sealed by rainfall or consists of smooth undisturbed cut slopes, and conventional or manual seeding is to be used, prepare seedbed by scarifying sufficiently to allow seed to lodge and germinate. 3. If temporary mulching was used on planting area but not removed, apply nitrogen fertilizer at 1 pound per 1000 sq ft. 4. On soils of very low fertility, apply 10-10-10 fertilizer at rate of 12 to 16 pounds per 1000 sq ft. 5. Incorporate fertilizer into soil before seeding. 6. Apply seed uniformly; if using drill or cultipacker seeders place seed 1/2 to 1 inch deep. 7. Irrigate as required to thoroughly wet soil to depth that will ensure germination, without causing runoff or erosion. 8. Repeat irrigation as required until grass is established. 3.05 MAINTENANCE A. Inspect preventive measures weekly, within 24 hours after the end of any storm that produces 0.5 inches or more rainfall at the project site, and daily during prolonged rainfall. B. Repair deficiencies immediately. C. Silt Fences: 1. Promptly replace fabric that deteriorates unless need for fence has passed. 2. Remove silt deposits that exceed one-third of the height of the fence. 3. Repair fences that are undercut by runoff or otherwise damaged, whether by runoff or other causes. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 0157 13-6 SECTION 0157 13 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL D. Clean out temporary sediment control structures weekly and relocate soil on site. E. Place sediment in appropriate locations on site; do not remove from site. 3.06 CLEAN UP A. Remove temporary measures after permanent measures have been installed, unless permitted to remain by Architect/Engineer. B. Clean out temporary sediment control structures that are to remain as permanent measures. C. Where removal of temporary measures would leave exposed soil, shape surface to an acceptable grade and finish to match adjacent ground surfaces. END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 0157 13-7 SECTION 0157 13 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL SECTION 0160 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. General product requirements. B. Re -use of existing products. C. Transportation, handling, storage and protection. D. Product option requirements. E. Substitution limitations and procedures. F. Maintenance materials, including extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data Submittals: Submit manufacturer's standard published data. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information specific to this Project. B. Shop Drawing Submittals: Prepared specifically for this Project; indicate utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances. C. Sample Submittals: Illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the product, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work. 1. For selection from standard finishes, submit samples of the full range of the manufacturer's standard colors, textures, and patterns. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EXISTING PRODUCTS A. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises unless specifically required or permitted by the Contract Documents. B. Unforeseen historic items encountered remain the property of the Owner; notify Owner promptly upon discovery; protect, remove, handle, and store as directed by Owner. C. Existing materials and equipment indicated to be removed, but not to be re -used, relocated, reinstalled, delivered to the Owner, or otherwise indicated as to remain the property of the Owner, become the property of the Contractor; remove from site. D. Reused Products: Reused products include materials and equipment previously used in this or other construction, salvaged and refurbished as specified. 2.02 NEW PRODUCTS A. Provide new products unless specifically required or permitted by the Contract Documents. B. Designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with industry standards. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 01 60 00 -1 SECTION 0160 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 2.03 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Use any product meeting those standards or description. B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Use a product of one of the manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed. C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named. 2.04 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software of types and in quantities specified in individual specification sections. B. Deliver to Project site and place in location directed by Owner's representative; obtain Owner's signature on receipt for delivery prior to final payment. Submit signed receipts with Closeout Submittals. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES A. Substitutions Prior To Bid Opening: ArchitecUEngineer will consider a written request for substitution provided that such request is received at least 6 days prior to the Bid opening date. Requests received after that time will not be considered. If a request is approved, the ArchiteeVEngineer will issue and appropriate addendum not less than 5 days prior to the Bid opening date. B. Substitutions After Notice of Award: Architect/Engineer will consider a request for substitution only under one or more of the following conditions: 1. Substitution is required for compliance with final interpretation of code requirements or insurance regulations. 2. Specified product is not available through no fault of the Contractor. 3. Specified product is not compatible with other specified materials/equipment. 4. Manufacturer will not certify or warranty specified product as required. C. Document each request utilizing Substitution Request Form following this section with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents. Incomplete requests will not be considered. D. A request for substitution constitutes a representation that the submitter: 1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified product. 2. Will provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product. 3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work that may be required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner. 4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension that may subsequently become apparent. 5. Will reimburse Owner for Architect/Engineer review or redesign services associated with re -approval by authorities having jurisdiction over the Project. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 016000-2 SECTION 0160 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS E. Substitutions of products or product characteristics/components/accessories will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on Contractor's submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will require revision to the Contract Documents, whether rejection of said substitutions is expressly identified by ArchitecUEngineer on Contractor's submittals or not. F. Substitution Submittal Procedure: 1. Submit two copies of request for substitution for consideration. Submit a separate Substitution Request Form and accompanying documentation for each proposed substitution. 2. Provide the following minimum documentation with each Substitution Request Form: a. Product identification, manufacturer, product data including dimensions and weight, performance and installation instructions. b. Side-by-side itemized comparison of proposed substitution with specified product. c. Coordination information including other modifications required as a result of proposed substitution. d. Cost information including the effect of the proposed substitution on the Contract Sum. 3. Sign and date the Substitution Request Form. 4. ArchitecUEngineer will notify submitter in writing of decision to accept or reject request. 3.02 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Package products for shipment in manner to prevent damage; for equipment, package to avoid loss of factory calibration. B. If special precautions are required, attach instructions prominently and legibly on outside of packaging. C. Coordinate schedule of product delivery to designated prepared areas in order to minimize site storage time and potential damage to stored materials. D. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. E. Transport materials in covered trucks to prevent contamination of product and littering of surrounding areas. F. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged. G. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. H. Arrange for the return of packing materials, such as wood pallets, where economically feasible. 3.03 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Designate receiving/storage areas for incoming products so that they are delivered according to installation schedule and placed convenient to work area in order to minimize waste due to excessive materials handling and misapplication. B. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. C. Store with seals and labels intact and legible. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 016000-3 SECTION 0160 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS D. Store sensitive products in weather tight, climate controlled, enclosures in an environment favorable to product. E. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground. F. Provide bonded off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site storage or protection. G. Protect products from damage or deterioration due to construction operations, weather, precipitation, humidity, temperature, sunlight and ultraviolet light, dirt, dust, and other contaminants. H. Comply with manufacturer's warranty conditions, if any. I. Do not store products directly on the ground. J. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation and degradation of products. K. Prevent contact with material that may cause corrosion, discoloration, or staining. L. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. M. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition. END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 016000-4 SECTION 0160 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM TO: PROJECT: SPECIFIED ITEM: eS dion Page Para rap The undersigned requests consideration of the following: PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION: escription Attached data includes project description, specifications, drawings, photographs, performance and test data adequate for evaluation of the request; applicable portions of the data are clearly identified. Attached data also includes a description of changes to the Contract Documents which the proposed substitution will require for its proper installation. The undersigned certifies that the following paragraphs, unless modified by attachments, are correct: 1. The proposed substitution does not affect dimensions shown on drawings. 2. The undersigned will pay for changes to the building design, including engineering design, detailings, and construction costs caused by the requested substitution. 3. The proposed substitution will have no adverse affect on other trades, the construction schedule, or specified warranty requirements. 4. Maintenance and service parts will be locally available for the proposed substitution. The undersigned further states that the function, appearance, and quality of the proposed substitution are equivalent or superior to the specified item. Signature Firm Address By: Date Date Telephone _ Remarks Attachments: For use by the design consultant [ ] Accepted [ ] Accepted as noted [ ] Not Accepted ] ] Received too late SECTION 0170 00 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS W-1:4111It4041 _ 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Examination, preparation, and general installation procedures. B. Requirements for alterations work, including selective demolition, except removal, disposal, and/or remediation of hazardous materials and toxic substances. C. Pre -installation meetings. D. Cutting and patching. E. Surveying for laying out the work. F. Cleaning and protection. G. Starting of systems and equipment. N. Demonstration and instruction of Owner personnel. I. Closeout procedures, except payment procedures. J. General requirements for maintenance service. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 0178 00 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents, operation and maintenance data, warranties and bonds. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Survey work: Submit name, address, and telephone number of Surveyor before starting survey work. 1. On request, submit documentation verifying accuracy of survey work. 2. Submit a copy of site drawing signed by the Land Surveyor, that the elevations and locations of the work are in conformance with Contract Documents. 3. Submit surveys and survey logs for the project record. C. Cutting and Patching: Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration that affects: 1. Structural integrity of any element of Project. 2. Integrity of weather exposed or moisture resistant element. 3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element. 4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements. 5. Work of Owner or separate Contractor. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 017000-1 SECTION 0170 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 1.04 QUALIFICATIONS A. For survey work, employ a land surveyor registered in the State in which the Project is located and acceptable to Architect/Engineer. Submit evidence of Surveyor's Errors and Omissions insurance coverage in the form of an Insurance Certificate. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and maintain pumping equipment. B. Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect site from soil erosion. C. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases. D. Dust Control: Execute work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations. Provide positive means to prevent air -borne dust from dispersing into atmosphere and over adjacent property. 1. Provide dust -proof barriers between construction areas and areas continuing to be occupied by Owner. E. Noise Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to minimize noise produced by construction operations. F. Pest and Rodent Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent pests and insects from damaging the work. G. Rodent Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent rodents from accessing or invading premises. H. Pollution Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent contamination of soil, water, and atmosphere from discharge of noxious, toxic substances, and pollutants produced by construction operations. Comply with federal, state, and local regulations. 1.06 COORDINATION A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of the Project Manual to ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later. B. Notify affected utility companies and comply with their requirements. C. Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of new operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment. D. Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical work that are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 017000-2 SECTION 0170 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. F. Coordinate completion and clean-up of work of separate sections. G. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective work and work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PATCHING MATERIALS A. New Materials: As specified in product sections; match existing products and work for patching and extending work. B. Type and Quality of Existing Products: Determine by inspecting and testing products where necessary, referring to existing work as a standard. C. Product Substitution: For any proposed change in materials, submit request for substitution described in Section 0160 00. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent work. Start of work means acceptance of existing conditions. B. Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new work being applied or attached. C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections. D. Take field measurements before confirming product orders or beginning fabrication, to minimize waste due to over -ordering or misfabrication. E. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct locations. F. Prior to Cutting: Examine existing conditions prior to commencing work, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. After uncovering existing work, assess conditions affecting performance of work. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance. B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance. C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying any new material or substance in contact or bond. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 017000-3 SECTION 0170 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 3.03 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. When required in individual specification sections, convene a preinstallation meeting at the site prior to commencing work of the section. B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific section. C. Notify ArchitecUEngineer four days in advance of meeting date. D. Prepare agenda and preside at meeting: 1. Review conditions of examination, preparation and installation procedures. 2. Review coordination with related work. E. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to ArchitecUEngineer, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made. 3.04 LAYING OUT THE WORK A. Verify locations of survey control points prior to starting work. B. Promptly notify ArchitecUEngineer of any discrepancies discovered. C. Protect survey control points prior to starting site work; preserve permanent reference points during construction. D. Promptly report to ArchitecUEngineer the loss or destruction of any reference point or relocation required because of changes in grades or other reasons. E. Replace dislocated survey control points based on original survey control. Make no changes without prior written notice to ArchitecUEngineer. F. Utilize recognized engineering survey practices. G. Establish elevations, lines and levels. Locate and lay out by instrumentation and similar appropriate means: 1. Site improvements including pavements; stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placement; utility locations, slopes, and invert elevations. 2. Grid or axis for structures. 3. Building foundation, column locations, ground floor elevations. H. Periodically verify layouts by same means. I. Maintain a complete and accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses. 3.05 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install products as specified in individual sections, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, and so as to avoid waste due to necessity for replacement. B. Make vertical elements plumb and horizontal elements level, unless otherwise indicated. C. Install equipment and fittings plumb and level, neatly aligned with adjacent vertical and horizontal lines, unless otherwise indicated. D. Make consistent texture on surfaces, with seamless transitions, unless otherwise indicated. PROJECT NO, 15-172-1017 017000-4 SECTION 0170 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS E. Make neat transitions between different surfaces, maintaining texture and appearance. HuIrw11111:4 ZT-11% IN] 11 H A. Drawings showing existing construction and utilities are based on casual field observation and existing record documents only. 1. Verify that construction and utility arrangements are as shown. 2. Report discrepancies to Architect/Engineer before disturbing existing installation. 3. Beginning of alterations work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions. B. Remove existing work as indicated and as required to accomplish new work. 1. Remove items indicated on drawings. 2. Relocate items indicated on drawings. 3. Where new surface finishes are to be applied to existing work, perform removals, patch, and prepare existing surfaces as required to receive new finish; remove existing finish if necessary for successful application of new finish. 4. Where new surface finishes are not specified or indicated, patch holes and damaged surfaces to match adjacent finished surfaces as closely as possible. C. Services (Including but not limited to HVAC, Plumbing, Fire Protection, Electrical, and Telecommunications): Remove, relocate, and extend existing systems to accommodate new construction. 1. Maintain existing active systems that are to remain in operation; maintain access to equipment and operational components; if necessary, modify installation to allow access or provide access panel. 2. Where existing systems or equipment are not active and Contract Documents require reactivation, put back into operational condition; repair supply, distribution, and equipment as required. 3. Where existing active systems serve occupied facilities but are to be replaced with new services, maintain existing systems in service until new systems are complete and ready for service. a. Disable existing systems only to make switchovers and connections; minimize duration of outages. b. Provide temporary connections as required to maintain existing systems in service. 4. Verify that abandoned services serve only abandoned facilities. 5. Remove abandoned pipe, ducts, conduits, and equipment, including those above accessible ceilings; remove back to source of supply where possible, otherwise cap stub and tag with identification; patch holes left by removal using materials specified for new construction. D. Protect existing work to remain. 1. Prevent movement of structure; provide shoring and bracing if necessary. 2. Perform cutting to accomplish removals neatly and as specified for cutting new work. 3. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during removal work. E. Adapt existing work to fit new work: Make as neat and smooth transition as possible. PROJECT N0, 15-172-1017 017000-5 SECTION 0170 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS F. Patching: Where the existing surface is not indicated to be refinished, patch to match the surface finish that existed prior to cutting. Where the surface is indicated to be refinished, patch so that the substrate is ready for the new finish. G. Refinish existing surfaces as indicated: 1. Where rooms or spaces are indicated to be refinished, refinish all visible existing surfaces to remain to the specified condition for each material, with a neat transition to adjacent finishes. 2. If mechanical or electrical work is exposed accidentally during the work, re-cover and refinish to match. H. Clean existing systems and equipment. I. Remove demolition debris and abandoned items from alterations areas and dispose of off-site; do not burn or bury. J. Do not begin new construction in alterations areas before demolition is complete. K. Comply with all other applicable requirements of this section. 3.07 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Whenever possible, execute the work by methods that avoid cuffing or patching. B. See Alterations article above for additional requirements. C. Perform whatever cutting and patching is necessary to: 1. Complete the work. 2. Fit products together to integrate with other work. 3. Provide openings for penetration of mechanical, electrical, and other services. 4. Match work that has been cut to adjacent work. 5. Repair areas adjacent to cuts to required condition. 6. Repair new work damaged by subsequent work. 7. Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested. 8. Remove and replace defective and non -conforming work. D. Execute work by methods that avoid damage to other work and that will provide appropriate surfaces to receive patching and finishing. In existing work, minimize damage and restore to original condition. E. Employ original installer to perform cuffing for weather exposed and moisture resistant elements, and sight exposed surfaces. F. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior approval. G. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. H. Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. 1. At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with fire rated material in accordance with Section 07 84 00, to full thickness of the penetrated element. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 017000-6 SECTION 0170 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS Patching: 1. Finish patched surfaces to match finish that existed prior to patching. On continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit. 2. Match color, texture, and appearance. 3. Repair patched surfaces that are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections due to patching work. If defects are due to condition of substrate, repair substrate prior to repairing finish. 3.08 PROGRESS CLEANING A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space. C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust. D. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and trash/rubbish from site periodically and dispose off-site; do not burn or bury. kFMJ;10)1x03i[417.[I7APb3L1g1:4TA10137 A. Protect installed work from damage by construction operations. B. Provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections. C. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate work area to prevent damage. D. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings. E. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials. F. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer. G. Remove protective coverings when no longer needed; reuse or recycle plastic coverings if possible. 3.10 SYSTEM STARTUP A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems. B. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, and for conditions that may cause damage. C. Verify tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer. D. Verify that wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 017000-7 SECTION 0170 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.. All Rights Reserved EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS E. Execute start-up under supervision of applicable Contractor personnel and manufacturer's representative in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. F. Submit a written report that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly. 3.11 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTION A. See Section 0179 00 - Demonstration and Training. 3.12 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation. 3.13 FINAL CLEANING A. Execute final cleaning prior to final project assessment. 1. Clean areas to be occupied by Owner prior to final completion before Owner occupancy. B. Use cleaning materials that are nonhazardous. C. Clean interior and exterior glass, surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces. D. Remove all labels that are not permanent. Do not paint or otherwise cover fire test labels or nameplates on mechanical and electrical equipment. E. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to the surface and material being cleaned. F. Clean filters of operating equipment. G. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems. H. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces. I. Remove waste, surplus materials, trash/rubbish, and construction facilities from the site; dispose of in legal manner; do not burn or bury. 3.14 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. See Section 0177 00 for additional requirements. B. Make submittals that are required by governing or other authorities. C. Notify Architect/Engineer when work is considered ready for Substantial Completion. D. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, work has been inspected, and that work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Arch itect/Engineer's review. E. Correct items of work listed in executed Certificates of Substantial Completion and comply with requirements for access to Owner -occupied areas. F. Notify Architect/Engineer when work is considered finally complete. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 017000-8 SECTION 0170 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC., All Rights Reserved EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS G. Complete items of work determined by ArchitecUEngineer's final inspection. 3.15 MAINTENANCE A. Provide service and maintenance of components indicated in specification sections. B. Maintenance Period: As indicated in specification sections or, if not indicated, not less than one year from the Date of Substantial Completion or the length of the specified warranty, whichever is longer. C. Examine system components at a frequency consistent with reliable operation. Clean, adjust, and lubricate as required. D. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of components. Repair or replace parts whenever required. Use parts produced by the manufacturer of the original component. E. Maintenance service shall not be assigned or transferred to any agent or subcontractor without prior written consent of the Owner. END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 017000-9 SECTION 01 70 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS SECTION 0177 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES: A. Substantial Completion Procedures. B. Final Completion Procedures. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS: A. Section 01 10 00 -Summary. B. Section 0178 00 - Closeout Submittals. 1.03 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Pre -Substantial Completion Conference: 1. General Contractor to schedule a Pre -substantial Completion Conference 15 days prior to the date of Substantial Completion, prepare an agenda with copies for the participants and preside over the meeting. 2. Attendance Required: Contractor, Architect/Engineer and Owner. 3. Minimum Agenda: a. Schedule dates of Substantial Completion and Owner occupancy. b. Schedule dates for Initial Punch Lists of respective Subcontractors to be produced. c. Schedule date for written request for Substantial Completion. d. Schedule target date for completion of Initial Punch List items. e. Schedule delivery times for Owner-fumished items to be installed by Contractor, Owner's own forces or others under separate Contracts. f. Schedule dates for Demonstration and Training of equipment and systems specified. g. Schedule completion dates of testing and balancing reports for engineered Systems. h. Scheduling and Sequencing of Construction operations around areas partially occupied. i. Review job site security during transition of Owner occupancy. j. Schedule dates for final inspections from authorities having jurisdiction for Occupancy Permits. k. Review protocol for claims from potential move -in damage. I. Review procedures for final cleaning. m. Review potential concerns regarding environmental conditions. 4. Record minutes and distribute copies within three days after meeting to participants and those affected by decisions made. B. Substantial Completion Procedures will be in accordance with the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Article 9.8 and include the following: 1. When the Work or a portion of the Work is considered to be substantially complete, the Contractor inspects the project and prepares a comprehensive list of outstanding items to be completed or corrected, Initial Punch List. 2. Contractor submits notice of Substantial Completion. 3. Contractor completes items on the Initial Punch List. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 01 77 00 -1 SECTION 0177 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 4. Architect/Engineer inspects the project to verify substantial completion and prepares a Final Punch List. 5. Architect/Engineer prepares Certificate of Substantial Completion, acceptance is required by Owner and Contractor. 1.04 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Final Completion Procedures will be in accordance with the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Article 9.10, and include the following: 1. When items on Initial and Final Punch Lists are complete, the Contractor submits notice of final completion and final application for payment. 2. Contractor submits Final Closeout Submittals as specified in Section 0178 00. 3. Architect inspects project and verifies the Work is acceptable and conforms with the Contract Documents. 4. Architect processes final application for payment and closeout submittals. 1.05 CORRECTION PERIOD A. Correction Period commences on the date of Substantial Completion and expires one year from that date. B. Owner: document non -conforming or defective work over course of Correction Period. Notify Contractor in writing of nonconforming or defective work. Copy Architect/Engineer. 1. Life safety issues requiring immediate corrective work: Contact Contractor for action. C. Post Construction Walk Through: 1. Time: eleven months after the date of Substantial Completion convene a meeting on site. 2. Attendees: Architect/Engineer, Owner's Representative, End User and Maintenance Staff. 3. Minimum Agenda: a. Review Owner's list of non -conforming or defective work. b. Conduct a walkthrough of the building and grounds c. Prepare a list of additional non -conforming or defective work items. 4. Architect/Engineer: a. Prepare written report of findings within two weeks of meeting. b. Notify Contractor of impending corrective work requiring action. c. Monitor execution of corrective Work. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED. PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED. END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 017700-2 SECTION 0177 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC,; All Rights Reserved CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES SECTION 0178 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Project Record Documents. B. Operation and Maintenance Data. C. Warranties and bonds. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures, shop drawings, product data, and samples. B. Section 0170 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Contract closeout procedures. C. Individual Product Sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance data. D. Individual Product Sections: Warranties required for specific products or Work. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Submit documents to Architect/Engineer with claim for final Application for Payment. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Submit two copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents before start of Work. Architect/Engineer will review draft and return one copy with comments. 2. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and operated by Owner, submit completed documents within ten days after acceptance. 3. Submit one copy of completed documents 15 days prior to final inspection. This copy will be reviewed and returned after final inspection, with Architect/Engineer comments. Revise content of all document sets as required prior to final submission. 4. Submit two sets of revised final documents in final form within 10 days after final inspection. C. Warranties and Bonds: 1. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with Owner's permission, submit documents within 10 days after acceptance. 2. Make other submittals within 10 days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final Application for Payment. 3. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial Completion, submit within 10 days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the beginning of the warranty period. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 01 78 00 -1 SECTION 0178 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work: 1. Drawings. 2. Addenda. 3. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract. B. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Owner. C. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction. D. Record information concurrent with construction progress. E. Record Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including: 1. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. 2. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work. 3. Field changes of dimension and detail. 4. Details not on original Contract drawings. 3.02 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Source Data: For each product or system, list names, addresses and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts. B. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and data applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable information. C. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings. D. Typed Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES A. For Each Product, Applied Material, and Finish: B. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental cleaning agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. C. Where additional instructions are required, beyond the manufacturer's standard printed instructions, have instructions prepared by personnel experienced in the operation and maintenance of the specific products. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 017800-2 SECTION 0178 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC., All Rights Reserved CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 3.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. For Each Item of Equipment and Each System: 1. Description of unit or system, and component parts. 2. Identify function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. 3. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests. 4. Complete nomenclature and model number of replaceable parts. B. Where additional instructions are required, beyond the manufacturer's standard printed instructions, have instructions prepared by personnel experienced in the operation and maintenance of the specific products. C. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut -down, and emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions. D. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions. E. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required. F. Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions. G. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer. H. Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for maintenance. 1. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification sections. 3.05 ASSEMBLY OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Assemble operation and maintenance data into durable manuals for Owner's personnel use, with data arranged in the same sequence as, and identified by, the specification sections. B. Where systems involve more than one specification section, provide separate tabbed divider for each system. C. Prepare instructions and data by personnel experienced in maintenance and operation of described products. D. Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual. E. Binders: Commercial quality, 8-1/2 by 11 inch three D side ring binders with durable plastic covers; 2 inch maximum ring size. When multiple binders are used, correlate data into related consistent groupings. F. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS; identify title of Project; identify subject matter of contents. G. Project Directory: Title and address of Project; names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Arch itect/Engineer, Consultants, Contractor and subcontractors, with names of responsible parties. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 017800-3 SECTION 0178 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS H. Tables of Contents: List every item separated by a divider, using the same identification as on the divider tab; where multiple volumes are required, include all volumes Tables of Contents in each volume, with the current volume clearly identified. I. Dividers: Provide tabbed dividers for each separate product and system; identify the contents on the divider tab; immediately following the divider tab include a description of product and major component parts of equipment. J. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data on 24 pound paper. K. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to size of text pages. 3.06 WARRANTIES AND BONDS A. Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers, within 10 days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except for items put into use with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until the Date of Substantial completion is determined. B. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized. C. Co -execute submittals when required. D. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal. END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 017800-4 SECTION 0178 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.. All Rights Reserved CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS SECTION 0179 00 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING PART1 GENERAL fKIIIE31Ti1LT, F_T`.37 A. Demonstration of products and systems where indicated in specific specification sections. B. Training of Owner personnel in operation and maintenance is required for: 1. Electrical systems and equipment. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 0191 13 - General Commissioning Requirements: Additional requirements applicable to demonstration and training. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Training Plan: Owner will designate personnel to be trained; tailor training to needs and skill -level of attendees. 1. Submit to Architect/Engineer for transmittal to Owner. 2. Submit not less than four weeks prior to start of training. 3. Revise and resubmit until acceptable. 4. Provide an overall schedule showing all training sessions. 5. Include at least the following for each training session: a. Identification, date, time, and duration. b. Description of products and/or systems to be covered. c. Name of firm and person conducting training; include qualifications. d. Intended audience, such as job description. e. Objectives of training and suggested methods of ensuring adequate training. I. Methods to be used, such as classroom lecture, live demonstrations, hands-on, etc. g. Media to be used, such a slides, hand-outs, etc. h. Training equipment required, such as projector, projection screen, etc., to be provided by Contractor. C. Training Manuals: Provide training manual for each attendee; allow for minimum of two attendees per training session. 1. Include applicable portion of 0&M manuals. 2. Include copies of all hand-outs, slides, overheads, video presentations, etc., that are not included in 0&M manuals. 3. Provide one extra copy of each training manual to be included with operation and maintenance data. D. Training Reports: 1. Identification of each training session, date, time, and duration. 2. Sign -in sheet showing names and job titles of attendees. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 01 79 00 -1 SECTION 0179 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 3. List of attendee questions and written answers given, including copies of and references to supporting documentation required for clarification; include answers to questions that could not be answered in original training session. E. Video Recordings: Submit digital video recording of each demonstration and training session for Owner's subsequent use. 1. Format: DVD Disc. 2. Label each disc and container with session identification and date. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Instructor Qualifications: Familiar with design, operation, maintenance and troubleshooting of the relevant products and systems. 1. Provide as instructors the most qualified trainer of those contractors and/or installers who actually supplied and installed the systems and equipment. 2. Where a single person is not familiar with all aspects, provide specialists with necessary qualifications. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 DEMONSTRATION - GENERAL A. Demonstrations conducted during system start-up do not qualify as demonstrations for the purposes of this section, unless approved in advance by Owner. B. Demonstration may be combined with Owner personnel training if applicable. C. Operating Equipment and Systems: Demonstrate operation in all modes, including start-up, shut -down, seasonal changeover, emergency conditions, and troubleshooting, and maintenance procedures, including scheduled and preventive maintenance. 1. Perform demonstrations not less than two weeks prior to Substantial Completion. 2. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other season within six months. D. Non -Operating Products: Demonstrate cleaning, scheduled and preventive maintenance, and repair procedures. 1. Perform demonstrations not less than two weeks prior to Substantial Completion. 3.02 TRAINING -GENERAL A. Conduct training on-site unless otherwise indicated. B. Owner will provide classroom and seating at no cost to Contractor. C. Provide training in minimum two hour segments. D. Training schedule will be subject to availability of Owner's personnel to be trained; re -schedule training sessions as required by Owner; once schedule has been approved by Owner failure to conduct sessions according to schedule will be cause for Owner to charge Contractor for personnel "show -up" time. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 017900-2 SECTION 0179 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING E. Review of Facility Policy on Operation and Maintenance Data: During training discuss: 1. The location of the 0&M manuals and procedures for use and preservation; backup copies. 2. Typical contents and organization of all manuals, including explanatory information, system narratives, and product specific information. 3. Typical uses of the O&M manuals. Product- and System -Specific Training: 1. Review the applicable 0&M manuals. 2. For systems, provide an overview of system operation, design parameters and constraints, and operational strategies. 3. Review instructions for proper operation in all modes, including start-up, shut -down, seasonal changeover and emergency procedures, and for maintenance, including preventative maintenance. 4. Provide hands-on training on all operational modes possible and preventive maintenance. 5. Emphasize safe and proper operating requirements; discuss relevant health and safety issues and emergency procedures. 6. Discuss common troubleshooting problems and solutions. 7. Discuss any peculiarities of equipment installation or operation. 8. Discuss warranties and guarantees, including procedures necessary to avoid voiding coverage. 9. Review recommended tools and spare parts inventory suggestions of manufacturers. 10.Review spare parts and tools required to be furnished by Contractor. 11. Review spare parts suppliers and sources and procurement procedures. G. Be prepared to answer questions raised by training attendees; if unable to answer during training session, provide written response within three days. END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 017900-3 SECTION 0179 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING SECTION 02 4100 DEMOLITION PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Selective demolition of building elements for alteration purposes. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 10 00 - Summary: Limitations on Contractor's use of site and premises. B. Section 0150 00 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Site fences, security, protective barriers, and waste removal. C. Section 0170 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Project conditions; protection of bench marks, survey control points, and existing construction to remain; reinstallation of removed products; temporary bracing and shoring. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 29 CFR 1926 - U.S. Occupational Safety and Health Standards; current edition. B. NFPA 241 - Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations; 2013. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: Company specializing in the type of work required. 1. Minimum of 3 years of documented experience. 171:1611 (*i11j>i[61ki1 3.01 GENERAL PROCEDURES AND PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Comply with other requirements specified in Section 0170 00. B. Comply with applicable codes and regulations for demolition operations and safety of adjacent structures and the public. 1. Obtain required permits. 2. Comply with applicable requirements of NFPA 241. 3. Use of explosives is not permitted. 4. Take precautions to prevent catastrophic or uncontrolled collapse of structures to be removed; do not allow worker or public access within range of potential collapse of unstable structures. 5. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices. 6. Use physical barriers to prevent access to areas that could be hazardous to workers or the public. 7. Conduct operations to minimize effects on and interference with adjacent structures and occupants. 8. Do not close or obstruct roadways or sidewalks without permit. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 02 41 00 -1 SECTION 02 4100 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved DEMOLITION 9. Conduct operations to minimize obstruction of public and private entrances and exits; do not obstruct required exits at any time; protect persons using entrances and exits from removal operations. 10.Obtain written permission from owners of adjacent properties when demolition equipment will traverse, infringe upon or limit access to their property. C. Do not begin removal until receipt of notification to proceed from Owner. D. Do not begin removal until built elements to be salvaged or relocated have been removed. E. Protect existing structures and other elements that are not to be removed. 1. Provide bracing and shoring. 2. Prevent movement or settlement of adjacent structures. 3. Stop work immediately if adjacent structures appear to be in danger. F. Minimize production of dust due to demolition operations; do not use water if that will result in ice, flooding, sedimentation of public waterways or storm sewers, or other pollution. G. If hazardous materials are discovered during removal operations, stop work and notify, Architect/Engineer and Owner; hazardous materials include regulated asbestos containing materials, lead, PCB's, and mercury. H. Perform demolition in a manner that maximizes salvage and recycling of materials. 1. Dismantle existing construction and separate materials. 2. Set aside reusable, recyclable, and salvageable materials; store and deliver to collection point or point of reuse. 3.02 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR ALTERATIONS A. Drawings showing existing construction and utilities are based on casual field observation and existing record documents only. 1. Verify that construction and utility arrangements are as shown. 2. Report discrepancies to Architect/Engineer before disturbing existing installation. 3. Beginning of demolition work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions that would be apparent upon examination prior to starting demolition. B. Separate areas in which demolition is being conducted from other areas that are still occupied. 1. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary dustproof partitions of construction specified in Section 0150 00 in locations indicated on drawings. C. Remove existing work as indicated and as required to accomplish new work. 1. Remove items indicated on drawings. D. Services (Including but not limited to Plumbing and Electrical): Remove existing systems and equipment as indicated. 1. Maintain existing active systems that are to remain in operation; maintain access to equipment and operational components. 2. Where existing active systems serve occupied facilities but are to be replaced with new services, maintain existing systems in service until new systems are complete and ready for service. 3. Verify that abandoned services serve only abandoned facilities before removal. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 024100-2 SECTION 02 4100 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved DEMOLITION 4. Remove abandoned pipe, ducts, conduits, and equipment, including those above accessible ceilings; remove back to source of supply where possible, otherwise cap stub and tag with identification. E. Protect existing work to remain. 1. Prevent movement of structure; provide shoring and bracing if necessary. 2. Perform cutting to accomplish removals neatly and as specified for cutting new work. 3. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during removal work. 4. Patch as specified for patching new work. 3.03 DEBRIS AND WASTE REMOVAL A. Remove debris, junk, and trash from site. B. Leave site in clean condition, ready for subsequent work. C. Clean up spillage and wind-blown debris from public and private lands. END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 024100-3 SECTION 02 4100 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved DEMOLITION SECTION 0310 00 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Formwork for cast -in place concrete, with shoring, bracing and anchorage. B. Openings for other work. C. Form accessories. D. Form stripping. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing. B. Section 03 30 00 - Cast -in -Place Concrete. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010, B. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete; 2010 (Errata 2012). C. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; 2014 (Errata 2016). D. ACI 347R - Guide to Formwork for Concrete; 2014. E. PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2009. 1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Design, engineer and construct formwork, shoring and bracing to conform to design and code requirements; resultant concrete to conform to required shape, line and dimension. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 347, ACI 301, and ACI 318. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FORMWORK - GENERAL A. Provide concrete forms, accessories, shoring, and bracing as required to accomplish cast -in-place concrete work. B. Design and construct to provide resultant concrete that conforms to design with respect to shape, lines, and dimensions. C. Chamfer outside corners of beams, joists, columns, and walls. D. Comply with applicable State and local codes with respect to design, fabrication, erection, and removal of formwork. PROJECT N0, 15-172-1017 03 10 00 -1 SECTION 0310 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC., All Rights Reserved CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES E. Comply with relevant portions of ACI 347, ACI 301, and ACI 318. 2.02 WOOD FORM MATERIALS A. Form Materials: At the discretion of the Contractor. 2.03 FORMWORK ACCESSORIES A. Form Release Agent: Capable of releasing forms from hardened concrete without staining or discoloring concrete or forming bugholes and other surface defects, compatible with concrete and form materials, and not requiring removal for satisfactory bonding of coatings to be applied. 1. Composition: Colorless mineral oil-based compound. 2. Do not use materials containing diesel oil or petroleum-based compounds. B. Filler Strips for Chamfered Corners: Rigid plastic type; 3/4 x 3/4 inch size; maximum possible lengths. C. Nails, Spikes, Lag Bolts, Through Bolts, Anchorages: Sized as required, of sufficient strength and character to maintain formwork in place while placing concrete. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify lines, levels and centers before proceeding with formwork. Ensure that dimensions agree with drawings. 3.02 ERECTION - FORMWORK A. Erect formwork, shoring and bracing to achieve design requirements, in accordance with requirements of ACI 301, B. Provide bracing to ensure stability of formwork. Shore or strengthen formwork subject to overstressing by construction loads. C. Arrange and assemble formwork to permit dismantling and stripping. Do not damage concrete during stripping. Permit removal of remaining principal shores. D. Align joints and make watertight. Keep form joints to a minimum. E. Obtain approval before framing openings in structural members that are not indicated on drawings. F. Provide fillet and chamfer strips on external corners of exposed corners. G. Coordinate this section with other sections of work that require attachment of components to formwork. H. If formwork is placed after reinforcement, resulting in insufficient concrete cover over reinforcement, request instructions from Architect/Engineer before proceeding. I. Provide continuous 2x4 minimum keyway in top of all footings as depicted on the drawings. 3.03 APPLICATION • FORM RELEASE AGENT A. Apply form release agent on formwork in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 03 1000-2 SECTION 0310 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES B. Apply prior to placement of reinforcing steel, anchoring devices, and embedded items. C. Do not apply form release agent where concrete surfaces will receive special finishes or applied coverings that are affected by agent. Soak inside surfaces of untreated forms with clean water. Keep surfaces coated prior to placement of concrete. 3.04 INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS, AND OPENINGS A. Provide formed openings where required for items to be embedded in passing through concrete work. B. Locate and set in place items that will be cast directly into concrete. C. Coordinate with work of other sections in forming and placing openings, slots, reglets, recesses, sleeves, bolts, anchors, other inserts, and components of other work. D. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, so they are straight, level, and plumb. Ensure items are not disturbed during concrete placement. E. Close temporary openings with tight fitting panels, flush with inside face of forms, and neatly fitted so joints will not be apparent in exposed concrete surfaces. 3.05 FORM CLEANING A. Clean forms as erection proceeds, to remove foreign matter within forms. B. Clean formed cavities of debris prior to placing concrete. 1. Flush with water or use compressed air to remove remaining foreign matter. Ensure that water and debris drain to exterior through clean-out ports. 2. During cold weather, remove ice and snow from within forms. Do not use de-icing salts. Do not use water to clean out forms, unless formwork and concrete construction proceed within heated enclosure. Use compressed air or other means to remove foreign matter. 3.06 FORMWORK TOLERANCES A. Construct formwork to maintain tolerances required by ACI 117, unless otherwise indicated. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect erected formwork, shoring, and bracing to ensure that work is in accordance with formwork design, and to verify that supports, fastenings, wedges, ties, and items are secure. B. Do not reuse wood formwork more than 2 times for concrete surfaces to be exposed to view. Do not patch formwork. 3.08 FORM REMOVAL A. Do not remove forms or bracing until concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry its own weight and imposed loads. B. Loosen forms carefully. Do not wedge pry bars, hammers, or tools against finish concrete surfaces scheduled for exposure to view. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 031000-3 SECTION 03 10 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES C. Store removed forms to prevent damage to form materials or to fresh concrete. Discard damaged forms. END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 031000-4 SECTION 03 10 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES SECTION 03 20 00 CONCRETE REINFORCING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Reinforcing steel for cast -in-place concrete. B. Supports and accessories for steel reinforcement. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 0310 00 - Concrete Forming and Accessories. B. Section 03 30 00 - Cast -in -Place Concrete. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete; 2010 (Errata 2012). B. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; 2014 (Errata 2016). C. ACI SP -66 - ACI Detailing Manual; 2004. D. ASTM A82/A82M - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement; 2007. E. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon -Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2016. F. WWR-500- Manual of Standard Practice; Structural Welded Wire Reinforcement; Wire Reinforcement Institute; latest edition. G. CRSI (DA4) - Manual of Standard Practice; Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute; latest edition. H. CRSI (P1) - Placing Reinforcing Bars; 2011. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Comply with requirements of ACI SP -66. Include bar schedules, shapes of bent bars, spacing of bars, and location of splices. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318. B. Prepare shop drawings under the supervision of a qualified Structural Engineer (SE) experienced and licensed in design of work of this type and licensed in the State in which the Project is located. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60 - 60,000 psi. 1. Deformed billet -steel bars. 2. Unfinished. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 03 20 00 -1 SECTION 03 20 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved CONCRETE REINFORCING B. Reinforcement Accessories: 1. Tie Wire: Annealed, minimum 16 gage, 0.0508 inch. 2. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Factory made wire bar supports sized and shaped for adequate support of reinforcement during concrete placement. 3. Provide stainless steel components for placement within 1-1/2 inches of weathering surfaces. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Fabricate concrete reinforcing in accordance with CRSI (DA4) - Manual of Standard Practice. B. Welding of reinforcement is not permitted. C. Locate reinforcing splices not indicated on drawings at point of minimum stress. 1. Review locations of splices with ArchitecUEngineer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PLACEMENT A. Place, support and secure reinforcement against displacement. Do not deviate from required position. Reinforcing "pull-up" during placement of concrete not acceptable. B. Accommodate placement of formed openings. C. Conform to applicable code for concrete cover over reinforcement. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. An independent testing agency, as specified in Section 0140 00, will inspect installed reinforcement for conformance to contract documents before concrete placement. B. Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with the appointed firm. END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 032000-2 SECTION 03 20 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved CONCRETE REINFORCING SECTION 03 30 00 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Concrete footings, foundation walls. B. Miscellaneous concrete elements, including equipment pads. C. Concrete curing. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 0310 00 - Concrete Forming and Accessories. B. Section 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing. C. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants: Products and installation for sealants for saw cut joints and isolation joints in slabs. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010. B. ACI 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete; 1991 (Reapproved 2009). C. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete; 2010 (Errata 2012). D. ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; 2000. E. ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting; 2010. F. ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting; 2010. G. ACI 308R - Guide to Curing Concrete; 2001 (Reapproved 2008). H. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; 2014 (Errata 2016). I. ASTM C33/C33M - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2016. J. ASTM C94/C94M - Standard Specification for Ready -Mixed Concrete; 2015. K. ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2016. L. ASTM C171 - Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete; 2007. M. ASTM C309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane -Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete; 2011. N. ASTM C494/C494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete; 2013. 0. ASTM C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete; 2015. PROJECT N0, 15-172-1017 03 30 00 -1 SECTION 03 30 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE P. NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; 2014 (Errata 2015). Q. NSF 372 - Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content; 2011. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. Product Data: Submit manufacturers' data on manufactured products showing compliance with specified requirements and installation instructions. 1. For curing compounds, provide data on method of removal in the event of incompatibility with floor covering adhesives. 2. Anchoring epoxy and expansion anchors. C. Mix Designs: Submit 15 days prior to start of work. 1. Submit for each type of concrete specified. 2. Include back-up test data. 3. Indicate proposed mix design complies with requirements of ACI 301, Section 4 - Concrete Mixtures. 4. Indicate proposed mix design complies with requirements of ACI 318, Chapter 5 - Concrete Quality, Mixing and Placing. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318. B. Follow recommendations of ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather. C. Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FORMWORK A. Comply with requirements of Section 03 10 00. 2.02 REINFORCEMENT A. Comply with requirements of Section 03 20 00. 2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cement: ASTM C150, Type I - Normal Portland type. 1. Acquire all cement for entire project from same source. B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C 33. 1. Acquire all aggregates for entire project from same source. C. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class C. D. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete. PROJECT N0, 15-172-1017 033000-2 SECTION 03 30 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 2.04 ADMIXTURES A. Do not use chemicals that will result in soluble chloride ions in excess of 0.1 percent by weight of cement. B. High Range Water Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type G. C. High Range Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type F. D.. Water Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type E. E. Water Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type D. F. Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type C. G. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type B. H. Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type A. 2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Anchoring Epoxy: Refer to drawings. Acceptable manufacturer's include 1. Hilti: HIT-RE500-SD injection anchoring system. 2. Simpson Strong -Tie: SET -XP injection anchoring adhesive system. 3. Powers Fasteners: PE 1000+ injection adhesive anchoring system. 2.06 CURING MATERIALS A. Curing Compound, Naturally Dissipating: Clear, water-based, liquid membrane -forming compound; complying with ASTM C309. B. Water: Potable, not detrimental to concrete. 2.07 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN A. Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.1 recommendations. B. Concrete Strength: Establish required average strength for each type of concrete on the basis of field experience or trial mixtures, as specified in ACI 301. 1. For trial mixtures method, employ independent testing agency acceptable to Architect/Engineer for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. C. Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI 211.1 and at rates recommended by manufacturer. Submit to Architect for review and approval. D. Normal Weight Concrete: Type "D". 1. Compressive Strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 39/C 39M at 28 days: 4,500 psi. 2. Fly Ash Content: Maximum 15 percent of cementitious materials by weight. 3. Water -Cement Ratio: Maximum 44 percent by weight. 4. Total Air Content: 6 percent, determined in accordance with ASTM C 173/C 173M. 5. Maximum Slump: 4 inches. 6. Maximum Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 033000-3 SECTION 03 30 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 2.08 MIXING A. Transit Mixers: Comply with ASTM C94/C94M. PART 3 EXECUTION E<�lSl• � I_1 i'ilta_rl[�Pl A. Verify lines, levels, and dimensions before proceeding with work of this section. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Verify that forms are clean and free of rust before applying release agent. B. Coordinate placement of embedded items with erection of concrete formwork and placement of form accessories. C. In locations where new concrete is doweled to existing work, drill holes in existing concrete, insert steel dowels and secure in place using approved epoxy. 3.03 PLACING CONCRETE A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R. B. Notify Architect/Engineer not less than 24 hours prior to commencement of placement operations. C. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature, and test samples taken. D. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, waterstops, embedded parts, and formed construction joint devices will not be disturbed during concrete placement. E. Place concrete continuously without construction (cold) joints wherever possible; where construction joints are necessary, before next placement prepare joint surface by removing laitance and exposing the sand and sound surface mortar, by sandblasting or high-pressure water jetting. 3.04 SLAB JOINTING A. Locate joint in center of long direction of the slab/pad. B. Anchor joint fillers and devices to prevent movement during concrete placement. C. Load Transfer Construction and Contraction Joints: Install load transfer devices as indicated; saw cut joint at surface as indicated for contraction joints. D. Saw Cut Contraction Joints: Saw cut joints before concrete begins to cool, within 4 to 12 hours after placing; use 3/16 inch thick blade and cut at least 1 inch deep but not less than one quarter (1/4) the depth of the slab. E. Place concrete continuously between predetermined expansion, control, and construction joints. F. Do not interrupt successive placement; do not permit cold joints to occur. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 033000-4 SECTION 03 30 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 3.05 FLOOR FLATNESS AND LEVELNESS TOLERANCES A. An independent testing agency, as specified in Section 0140 00, will inspect finished slabs for conformance to specified tolerances. B. Screed slabs on grade level, maintaining the following minimum F(F) Floor Flatness and F(L) Floor Levelness values when measured in accordance with ASTM E 1155/ASTM E 1155M. 1. F(F): Specified Overall Value (SOV) of 35; Minimum Localized Value (MLV) of 24. 2. F(L): Specified Overall Value (SOV) of 25; Minimum Localized Value (MLV) of 17. C. Correct the slab surface if tolerances are less than specified. D. Measure F(F) and F(L) in accordance with ASTM El 155, within 48 hours after slab installation; report both composite overall values and local values for each measured section. E. Correct the slab surface if composite overall value is less than specified and if local value is less than two-thirds of specified value or less than F(F) 13/F(L) 10. F. Correct defects by grinding or by removal and replacement of the defective work. Areas requiring corrective work will be identified. Re -measure corrected areas by the same process. 3.06 CONCRETE FINISHING A. Repair surface defects, including tie holes, immediately after removing formwork. B. Unexposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch or more in height. C. Exposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off and smooth fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch or more in height. Provide finish as follows: 1. Smooth Rubbed Finish: Wet concrete and rub with carborundum brick or other abrasive, not more than 24 hours after form removal. D. Concrete Slabs: Finish to requirements of ACI 302.1R, and as follows: 1. Provide light broom finish on exterior flat work. 2. Provide 3/4" radiused edge on exposed slab edges, unless otherwise noted. 3.07 CURING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with requirements of ACI 308R. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury. B. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 0140 00. B. Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with appointed firm. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 033000-5 SECTION 03 30 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 3.09 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE A. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances or specified requirements. B. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Architect/Engineer. The cost of additional testing shall be borne by Contractor when defective concrete is identified. C. Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction of Architect/Engineer for each individual area. 3.10 PROTECTION A. Do not permit traffic over unprotected concrete floor surface until fully cured. 3.11 SCHEDULE -CONCRETE TYPES AND FINISHES Location A. Footings B. Foundation walls and piers C. Equipment pads: Exterior top: non -slip Mix Type D D D END OF SECTION Concrete Finish smooth form smooth form sides: smooth form PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 033000-6 SECTION 03 30 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 04 20 00 UNIT MASONRY PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Hollow Brick. B. Mortar and Grout. C. Reinforcement and Anchorage. D. Flashings. E. Accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing: Reinforcing steel for grouted masonry. B. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants: Sealing control and expansion joints. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 530/530.1/ERTA - Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry Structures and Related Commentaries; 2013. B. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2014. C. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2009. D. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon -Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2016. E. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process; 2015. F. ASTM A1064/A1064M - Standard Specification for Carbon -Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete; 2015. G. ASTM C144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar; 2011. H. ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2016. I. ASTM C207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes; 2006 (Reapproved 2011). J. ASTM C216 - Standard Specification for Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made From Clay or Shale); 2016. K. ASTM C270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry; 2014a. L. ASTM C404 - Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout; 2011. M. ASTM C476 - Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry; 2016. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 04 20 00 -1 SECTION 04 20 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved UNIT MASONRY N. ASTM C652 - Standard Specification for Hollow Brick (Hollow Masonry Units Made From Clay or Shale); 2015. 0. ASTM C979/C979M - Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete; 2010. P. ASTM C1314 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Masonry Prisms; 2016. Q. ASTM C1357 - Standard Test Methods for Evaluating Masonry Bond Strength ; 2009. R. BIA Technical Notes No. 7 - Water Penetration Resistance — Design and Detailing; 2005. S. BIA Technical Notes No. 46 - Maintenance of Brick Masonry; 2005. T. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; current edition. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data for masonry units, fabricated wire reinforcement, mortar, and masonry accessories. C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that masonry units meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with provisions of ACI 530/530.1/ERTA, except where exceeded by requirements of the contract documents. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience. C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified and with at least three years of documented experience. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, handle, and store masonry units by means that will prevent mechanical damage and contamination by other materials. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 BRICK UNITS A. Manufacturers: 1. Glen-Gery Corporation: Regent Bricks; www.glengerrybrick.com. 2. Substitutions: See section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. B. Hollow Facing and Building Brick: ASTM C652, Grade SW; Type HBS; Class H40V. 1. Color and texture: to match existing building. 2. Nominal size: 7-5/8" thick x 3-5/8" high x 11-5/8" long. 2.02 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Type 1. PROJECT NO. 15.172-1017 042000-2 SECTION 04 20 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC., All Rights Reserved UNIT MASONRY B. Hydrated lime: ASTM C207, Type S. C. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144. D. Grout Aggregate: ASTM C404. E. Pigments for Colored Mortar: Pure, concentrated mineral pigments specifically intended for mixing into mortar and complying with ASTM C979/C979M. 1. Color(s): to match existing. F. Water: Clean and potable. G. Accelerating Admixture: Nonchloride type for use in cold weather. H. Moisture -Resistant Admixture: Water repellent compound designed to reduce capillarity. 2.03 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE A. Manufacturers: 1. Blok-Lok Limited: www.blok-lok.com. 2. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc: www.h-b.com/sle. 3. WIRE -BOND: www.wirebond.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. B. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 40 (40,000 psi), deformed billet bars; galvanized. C. Single Wythe Joint Reinforcement: Ladder type; ASTM A1064/A1064M steel wire, hot dip galvanized after fabrication to ASTM A153/A153M, Class B; 0.1483 inch side rods with 0.1483 inch cross rods; width as required to provide not more than 1 inch and not less than 1/2 inch of mortar coverage on each exposure. 2.04 FLASHINGS A. Rubberized Asphalt Flashing: Self -adhering polymer modified asphalt sheet; 40 mils (0.040 inch) minimum total thickness; with cross laminated polyethylene top and bottom surfaces. 1. Manufacturers: a. Advanced Building Products, Inc.; Strip -N -Flash: www.advancedbuildingproducts.com/sle. b. York Manufacturing, Inc; York Seal: www.yorkmfg.com. c. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Preformed Control Joints: Rubber material. Provide with corner and tee accessories, fused joints. 1. Manufacturers: a. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc; Product: # RS Series: www.h-b.com/sle. b. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. B. Joint Filler: Closed cell neoprene; oversized 50 percent to joint width; selfexpanding; 4 inch wide by maximum lengths available. 1. Manufacturers: a. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc; Product: # NS -TA: www.h-b.com/sle. b. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 042000-3 SECTION 04 20 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved UNIT MASONRY C. Drip Edge: Stainless steel; compatible with membrane and adhesives. D. Weeps: 1. Type: Single Wythe Masonry Type. 2. Manufacturers: a. Mortar Net Solutions; BlockFlash: www.mortamet.com. b. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. E. Cleaning Solution: Non -acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials. 2.06 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. Mortar for Unit Masonry: ASTM C27O, using the Proportion Specification. 1. Exterior, loadbearing masonry: Type N. B. Colored Mortar: Proportion selected pigments and other ingredients to match Architect/Engineer's sample, without exceeding manufacturer's recommended pigment -to -cement ratio. C. Grout: ASTM C476; consistency required to fill completely volumes indicated for grouting; fine grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension of 2 inches or less; coarse grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension greater than 2 inches. D. Admixtures: Add to mixture at manufacturer's recommended rate and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; mix uniformly. E. Mixing: Use mechanical batch mixer and comply with referenced standards. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive masonry. B. Verify that related items provided under other sections are properly sized and located. C. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied for installation under other sections. 3.03 COLD AND HOT WEATHER REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with requirements of ACI 53O153O.1/ERTA or applicable building code, whichever is more stringent. 3.04 COURSING A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement. B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform thickness. C. Brick Units: 1. Bond: Running. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 042000-4 SECTION 04 20 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved UNIT MASONRY 2. Coursing: Two units and two mortarjoints to equal 8 inches. 3. Mortar Joints: Concave. 3.05 PLACING AND BONDING A. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints. B. Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints is not permitted. C. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses. D. Interlock intersections and external corners. E. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace. F. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, unchipped edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges. 3.06 WEEPSICAVITY VENTS A. Install weeps in single wythe walls at 8 inches on center horizontally above through -wall flashing and at bottom of walls. 3.07 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE - GENERAL A. Unless otherwise indicated on drawings or specified under specific wall type, install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches on center. B. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below openings. Extend minimum 16 inches each side of opening. C. Place continuous joint reinforcement in first and second joint below top of walls. D. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches. 3.06 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE - SINGLE WYTHE MASONRY A. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 8 inches on center. B. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below openings. Extend minimum 16 inches each side of opening. C. Place continuous joint reinforcement in first and second joint below top of walls. D. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches. 3.09 MASONRY FLASHINGS A. Whether or not specifically indicated, install masonry flashing to divert water to exterior at all locations where downward flow of water will be interrupted. B. Extend metal flashings through exterior face of masonry and turn down to form drip. Install joint sealer below drip edge to prevent moisture migration under flashing. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 042000-5 SECTION 04 20 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved UNIT MASONRY 3.10 GROUTED COMPONENTS A. Lap splices minimum 24 bar diameters. B. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within 1/2 inch of dimensioned position. C. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing. 3.11 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control or expansion joints. B. Install preformed control joint device in continuous lengths. Seal butt and corner joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Size control joints as indicated on drawings; if not shown, 3/4 inch wide and deep. 3.12 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/16 inch. B. Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: 1/4 inch in 10 ft and 1/2 inch in 20 ft or more. C. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch per story non -cumulative; 1/2 inch in two stories or more. D. Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8 inch in 3 ft and 1/4 inch in 10 ft; 1/2 inch in 30 ft. E. Maximum Variation of Mortar Joint Thickness: Head joint, minus 1/4 inch, plus 3/8 inch. F. Maximum Variation from Cross Sectional Thickness of Walls: 1/4 inch. 3.13 CLEANING A. Remove excess mortar and mortar droppings. B. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work. C. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution. D. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations. 3.14 PROTECTION A. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners that are subject to damage by construction activities. END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 042000-6 SECTION 04 20 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved UNIT MASONRY SECTION 04 72 00 CAST STONE MASONRY PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Architectural cast stone. B. Units required are: 1. Exterior wall units, including wall caps and coping. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry: Installation of cast stone in conjunction with masonry. B. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants: Sealing joints indicated to be left open for sealant. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; 2014 (Errata 2016). B. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon -Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2016. C. ASTM A767/A767M - Standard Specification for Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2009 (Reapproved 2015). D. ASTM A884/A884M - Standard Specification for Epoxy -Coated Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement; 2014. E. ASTM A1064/A1064M - Standard Specification for Carbon -Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete; 2015. F. ASTM C33/C33M - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2016. G. ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2016. H. ASTM C270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry; 2014a. I. ASTM C494/C494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete; 2013. J. ASTM C1364 - Standard Specification for Architectural Cast Stone; 2016. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Test results of cast stone components made previously by the manufacturer. 1. Include one copy of ASTM C1364 for Architect/Engineer's use. C. Shop Drawings: Include elevations, dimensions, layouts, profiles, cross sections, reinforcement, exposed faces, arrangement of joints, anchoring methods, anchors, and piece numbers. D. Verification Samples: Pieces of actual cast stone components not less than 6 inches square, illustrating range of color and texture to be anticipated in components furnished for the project. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 04 72 00 -1 SECTION 04 72 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved CAST STONE MASONRY E. Manufacturer's Qualification Data: Documentation showing compliance with specified requirements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: 1. A firm with a minimum of 5 years experience producing cast stone of types required for project. 2. Current producer member of the Cast Stone Institute or the Architectural Precast Association. 3. Manufacturer's production facility currently holds a Plant Certification from the Cast Stone Institute or the Architectural Precast Association. 4. Adequate plant capacity to furnish quality, sizes, and quantity of cast stone required without delaying progress of the work. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver cast stone components secured to shipping pallets and protected from damage and discoloration. Protect corners from damage. B. Number each piece individually to match shop drawings and schedule. C. Store cast stone components and installation materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Store cast stone components on pallets with nonstaining, waterproof covers. Ventilate under covers to prevent condensation. Prevent contact with dirt. E. Protect cast stone components during handling and installation to prevent chipping, cracking, or other damage. F. Store mortar materials where contamination can be avoided. G. Schedule and coordinate production and delivery of cast stone components with unit masonry work to optimize on-site inventory and to avoid delaying the work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ARCHITECTURAL CAST STONE A. Cast Stone: Architectural concrete product manufactured to simulate appearance of natural limestone, complying with ASTM C1364. 1. Compressive Strength: As specified in ASTM C1364; calculate strength of pieces to be field cut at 80 percent of uncut piece. 2. Freeze -Thaw Resistance: Demonstrated by laboratory testing in accordance with ASTM C1364. 3. Surface Texture: Fine grained texture, with no bugholes, air voids, or other surface blemishes visible from distance of 20 feet. 4. Color: Match existing. 5. Remove cement film from exposed surfaces before packaging for shipment. B. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated on drawings. 1. Variation from Any Dimension, Including Bow, Camber, and Twist: Maximum of plus/minus 1/8 inch or length divided by 360, whichever is greater, but not more than 1/4 inch. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 047200-2 SECTION 04 72 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved CAST STONE MASONRY 2. Unless otherwise indicated on drawings, provide: a. Wash or slope of 1:12 on exterior horizontal surfaces. b. Drips on projecting components, wherever possible. c. Raised fillets at back of sills and at ends to be built in. C. Reinforcement: Provide reinforcement as required to withstand handling and structural stresses; comply with ACI 318. 1. Pieces More than 24 inches in Any Dimension: Provide full length two-way reinforcement of cross-sectional area not less than 0.25 percent of unit cross-sectional area. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150/C150M. 1. For Mortar: Type I or II, except Type III maybe used in cold weather. B. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C33/C33M, except for gradation; granite, quartz, or limestone. C. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C33/C33M, except for gradation; natural or manufactured sands. D. Admixtures: ASTM C494/C494M. E. Water: Potable. F. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615IA615M deformed bars, galvanized. 1. Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A767/A767M, Class I. G. Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A1064/A1064M, galvanized or ASTM A884/A884M, epoxy coated. H. Embedded Anchors, Dowels, and Inserts: Type 304 stainless steel, of type and size as required for conditions. I. Mortar: Portland cement -lime, as specified in Section 04 0511; do not use masonry cement. J. Cleaner: General-purpose cleaner designed for removing mortar and grout stains, efflorescence, and other construction stains from new masonry surfaces without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces; approved for intended use by cast stone manufacturer and by cleaner manufacturer for use on cast stone and adjacent masonry materials. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine construction to receive cast stone components. Notify Architect/Engineer if construction is not acceptable. B. Do not begin installation until unacceptable conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install cast stone components in conjunction with masonry, complying with requirements of Section 04 20 00. B. Mechanically anchor cast stone units indicated; set remainder in mortar, PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 047200-3 SECTION 04 72 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved CAST STONE MASONRY C. Setting: 1. Drench cast stone components with clear, running water immediately before installation. 2. Set units in a full bed of mortar unless otherwise indicated. 3. Fill vertical joints with mortar. 4. Fill dowel holes and anchor slots completely with mortar or non -shrink grout. D. Joints: Make all joints 3/8 inch, except as otherwise detailed. 1. Rake mortar joints 3/4 inch for sealant placement at all field joints. 2. Remove excess mortar from face of stone before pointing joints. 3. Point joints with mortar in layers 3/8 inch thick and tool to a slight concave profile. 4. Leave the following joints open for sealant: a. Head joints in top courses, including copings, parapets, cornices, sills, and steps. b. Joints in projecting units. c. Joints between rigidly anchored units, including soffits, panels, and column covers. d. Joints below lugged sills and stair treads. e. Joints below ledge and relieving angles. f. Joints labeled "expansion joint". E. Installation Tolerances: 1. Variation from Plumb: Not more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet or 1/4 inch in 20 feet or more. 2. Variation from Level: Not more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet or 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 3/8 inch maximum. 3. Variation in Joint Width: Not more than 1/8 inch in 36 inches or 1/4 of nominal joint width, whichever is less. 4. Variation in Plane Between Adjacent Surfaces (Lipping): Not more than 1/16 inch difference between planes of adjacent units or adjacent surfaces indicated to be flush with units. F. Repairs: Repair chips and other surface damage noticeable when viewed in direct daylight at 20 feet. 1. Repair with matching touchup material provided by the manufacturer and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Repair methods and results subject to ArchitecUEngineer's approval. 3.03 CLEANING A. Clean completed exposed cast stone after mortar is thoroughly set and cured. 1. Wet surfaces with water before applying cleaner. 2. Apply cleaner to cast stone in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3. Remove cleaner promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water. 4. Do not use acidic cleaners. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Protect completed work from damage. B. Clean, repair, or restore damaged or mortar -splashed work to condition of new work. END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 047200-4 SECTION 04 72 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved CAST STONE MASONRY SECTION 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS [01 ASKC14i14 7_11111 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2016. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data for Sealants: Submit manufacturer's technical data sheets for each product to be used, that includes the following. 1. Physical characteristics, including movement capability, VOC content, hardness, cure time, and color availability. 2. List of backing materials approved for use with the specific product. 3. Substrates that product is known to satisfactorily adhere to and with which it is compatible. 4. Substrates the product should not be used on. 5. Substrates for which use of primer is required. C. Color Cards for Selection: Where sealant color is not specified, submit manufacturer's color cards showing standard colors available for selection. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section and with at least three years of documented experience. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 JOINT SEALANT APPLICATIONS A. Scope: 1. Exterior Joints: Seal open joints, whether or not the joint is indicated on the drawings, unless specifically indicated not to be sealed. Exterior joints to be sealed include, but are not limited to, the following items. a. Wall expansion and control joints. b. Cast stone coping joints. c. Joints between door, window, and other frames and adjacent construction. d. Joints between different exposed materials. e. Openings below ledge angles in masonry. f. Other joints indicated below. 2. Do not seal the following types of joints. a. Intentional weepholes in masonry. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 07 92 00 -1 SECTION 07 92 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved JOINT SEALANTS b. Joints indicated to be treated with manufactured expansion joint cover or some other type of sealing device. c. Joints where sealant is specified to be provided by manufacturer of product to be sealed. d. Joints where installation of sealant is specified in another section. e. Joints between suspended panel ceilings/grid and walls. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that joints are ready to receive work. B. Verify that backing materials are compatible with sealants. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter that could impair adhesion of sealant. B. Clean joints, and prime as necessary, in accordance with manufacturers instructions. C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C1193, D. Mask elements and surfaces adjacent to joints from damage and disfigurement due to sealant work; be aware that sealant drips and smears may not be completely removable. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturers requirements for preparation of surfaces and material installation instructions. B. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193, C. Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Width/depth ratio of 2:1. 2. Neck dimension no greater than 1/3 of the joint width. 3. Surface bond area on each side not less than 75 percent of joint width. D. Install bond breaker backing tape where backer rod cannot be used. E. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags, and without getting sealant on adjacent surfaces. F. Do not install sealant when ambient temperature is outside manufacturers recommended temperature range, or will be outside that range during the entire curing period, unless manufacturer's approval is obtained and instructions are followed. G. Nonsag Sealants: Tool surface concave, unless otherwise indicated; remove masking tape immediately after tooling sealant surface. H. Cast Stone Copings: Install sealant joints at all raked mortar/field joints in cast stone copings. END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 079200-2 SECTION 07 92 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved JOINT SEALANTS SECTION 09 9113 EXTERIOR PAINTING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface preparation. B. Field application of paints. C. Scope: Finish exterior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory -finished and unless otherwise indicated, including the following: 1. Mechanical and Electrical: a. At the outdoors, paint equipment, gas piping and conduit that is exposed to weather or to view, including factory -finished materials. D. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items: 1. Items factory -finished unless otherwise indicated; materials and products having factory -applied primers are not considered factory finished. 2. Items indicated to receive other finishes. 3. Items indicated to remain unfinished. 4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, and operating parts of equipment. 5. Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 22 05 53 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment: Painted identification. B. Section 23 05 53 - Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment: Painted identification. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Conform to ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this section. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM D16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications; 2014. B. MPI (APSM) - Master Painters Institute Architectural Painting Specification Manual; current edition, www.paintinfo.com. C. SSPC-SP 1 - Solvent Cleaning; 2015, D. SSPC-SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning; 1982 (Ed. 2004). E. SSPC-SP 6 - Commercial Blast Cleaning; Society for Protective Coatings; 2007. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements, for Submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide complete list of products to be used, with the following information for each: PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 0991 13-1 SECTION 09 91 13 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved EXTERIOR PAINTING 1. Manufacturers name, product name and/or catalog number, and general product category (e.g. "alkyd enamel"). 2. MPI product number (e.g. MPI #47). 3. Cross-reference to specified paint system(s) product is to be used in; include description of each system. 4. Manufacturer's installation instructions. C. Samples: Submit three paper "draw down" samples, 8-1/2 by 11 inches in size, illustrating range of colors available for each finishing product specified. 1. Where sheen is specified, submit samples in only that sheen. 2. Where sheen is not specified, discuss sheen options with Architect/Engineer before preparing samples, to eliminate sheens definitely not required. D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate special surface preparation procedures. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified, with minimum three years documented experience. B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified with minimum 5 years experience and approved by manufacturer. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability. B. Container Label: Include manufacturers name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturers instructions. 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations. C. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid -height at substrate surface. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide paints and finishes used in any individual system from the same manufacturer; no exceptions. 2.02 PAINTS AND FINISHES - GENERAL A. Paints and Finishes: Ready mixed, unless required to be a field -catalyzed paint. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 0991 13-2 SECTION 09 91 13 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved EXTERIOR PAINTING 1. Provide paints and finishes of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties, and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. 2. Supply each paint material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from a single production run. 3. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute paint or finishes or add materials unless such procedure is specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions. 2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS - EXTERIOR A. Paint E -OP - Exterior Surfaces to be Painted, Unless Otherwise Indicated: Including ferrous metal. 1. Two top coats and one coat primer. 2. Top Coat(s): Exterior Alkyd Enamel; MPI #94. 2.04 PRIMERS A. Primers: Provide the following unless other primer is required or recommended by manufacturer of top coats. 1. Anti -Corrosive Alkyd Primer for Metal; MPI #79. 2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Accessory Materials: Provide primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding materials, and clean-up materials as required for final completion of painted surfaces. B. Patching Material: Latex filler. C. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer. B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially effect proper application. C. Test shop -applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to application. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. C. Remove or mask surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces for finishing. D. Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat. E. Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of tetra -sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 099113-3 SECTION 09 9113 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved EXTERIOR PAINTING F. Galvanized Surfaces: 1. Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent according to SSPC-SP 1. 2. Prepare surface according to SSPC-SP 2. G. Ferrous Metal: 1. Solvent clean according to SSPC-SP 1. 2. Shop -Primed Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. Re -prime entire shop -primed item. 3. Remove rust, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer and blast cleaning according to SSPC-SP 6 "Commercial Blast Cleaning". Protect from corrosion until coated. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and paint separately. B. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual". C. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is applied. D. Apply each coat to uniform appearance. E. Dark Colors and Deep Clear Colors: Regardless of number of coats specified, apply additional coats until complete hide is achieved. F. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to applying next coat. G. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior to finishing. 3.04 CLEANING A. Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove daily from site. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect finishes until completion of Project. B. Touch-up damaged finishes after Substantial Completion. 3.06 COLOR SCHEDULE A. Match adjacent exterior surfaces color. END OF SECTION PROJECT N0, 15-172-1017 0991 13-4 SECTION 09 91 13 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC., All Rights Reserved EXTERIOR PAINTING SECTION 23 11 23 FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe, pipe fittings, valves, and connections for natural gas piping systems. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 09 91 13 - Exterior Painting. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI Z21.18/CSA 6.3 - Gas Appliance Pressure Regulators; 2007 (Reaffirmed 2012). B. ASME BPVC-IX - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX - Welding, Brazing, and Fusing Qualifications; 2015. C. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings: Classes 150 and 300; 2011. D. ASME 831.1 - Power Piping; 2014. E. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping; 2014. F. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped, Zinc -Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2012. G. ASTM A234/A234M - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service; 2015. H. MSS SP -78 - Cast Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends; 2011. I. MSS SP -110 - Ball Valves Threaded, Socket -Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends; 2010. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with applicable codes. B. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body. C. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME BPVC-IX and applicable state labor regulations. D. Welder Qualifications: Certified in accordance with ASME BPVC-IX. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage. B. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves. C. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. D. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 2311 23 -1 SECTION 23 1123 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.. All Rights Reserved FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 NATURAL GAS PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Schedule 40 black. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron, or ASTM A234/A234M, wrought steel welding type. 2. Joints: Threaded or welded to ASME 831.1. 2.02 FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS A. Unions for Pipe Sizes 3 Inches and Under: 1. Ferrous pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded unions. B. Flanges for Pipe Size Over 1 Inch: 1. Ferrous Pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded or forged steel slip-on flanges; preformed neoprene gaskets. 2.03 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Provide hangers and supports that comply with MSS SP -58. 1. If type of hanger or support for a particular situation is not indicated, select appropriate type using MSS SP -58 recommendations. Will IVA41 A. Construction, 4 Inches and Smaller: MSS SP -110, Class 150, 400 psi CWP, bronze or ductile iron body, chrome plated brass ball, regular port, Teflon seats and stuffing box ring, blow-out proof stem, lever handle, threaded ends with union. 2.05 PLUG VALVES A. Construction 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: MSS SP -78, 175 psi CWP, cast iron body and plug, pressure lubricated, Teflon or Buna N packing, flanged or threaded ends. Provide lever operator with set screw. 2.06 LINE PRESSURE REGULATORS AND APPLIANCE REGULATORS INDICATORS A. Compliance Requirements: 1. Appliance Regulator: ANSI Z21.18/CSA 6.3. B. Materials in Contact With Gas: 1. Housing: Aluminum, steel (free of non-ferrous metals). 2. Seals and Diaphragms: NBR-based rubber. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 23 1123-2 SECTION 23 11 23 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls. C. Prepare exposed, unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories ready for finish painting. D. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. E. Pipe Hangers and Supports: 1. Install in accordance with ASME 831.9. 2. Support horizontal piping as scheduled. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections. B. Provide plug valves in natural gas systems for shut-off service. 3.04 SCHEDULES A. Pipe Hanger Spacing: 1. Metal Piping: a. Pipe Size: 1/2 inches to 1-1/4 inches: a) Maximum Hanger Spacing: 6.5 ft. b) Hanger Rod Diameter: 3/8 inches. b. Pipe Size: 1-1/2 inches to 2 inches: a) Maximum Hanger Spacing: 10 ft. b) Hanger Rod Diameter: 3/8 inch. END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 23 1123-3 SECTION 23 11 23 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING SECTION 26 05 00 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 1721:1AWC1 I4Zn 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. A. Basic Electrical Requirements specifically applicable to Division 26 Sections, in addition to Division 01 - General Requirements. 1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Provide all materials and labor in conformance with the following codes and standards: 1. Village of Oak Brook - Code of Ordinances. 2. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code 2008 Edition as adopted and Amended by the Village of Oak Brook, Illinois. 3. IBC International Building Code, 2009 Edition, with local amendments. 4. IECC International Energy Conservation Code, 2006 Edition with local amendments. 5. International Fire Code, First Edition, 2003, with local amendments. 6. ADA -AG - American with Disabilities Act - Accessibility Guidelines. 7. Illinois Accessibility Code, 1997 Edition (Illinois Administrative Code, Title 71, Chapter I, Subchapter b, Part 400). 8. Underwriter's Laboratory. 9. Install electrical Work in accordance with the NECA Standard of Installation. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store and protect all materials as specified under the provisions of Section 0160 00 and as specified herein. B. Deliver products to the project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades, compliance labels, and other information needed for identification. C. Ship products to the job site in their original packaging. Receive and store products in a suitable manner to prevent damage or deterioration. Keep equipment upright at all times. D. Investigate the spaces through which equipment must pass to reach its final destination. Coordinate with the manufacturer to arrange delivery at the proper stage of construction and to provide shipping splits where necessary. 1.05 PROJECTISITE CONDITIONS A. Install work in locations shown on Drawings, unless prevented by Project conditions. Drawings have omitted certain branch circuitry in areas for ease of reading. All branch circuitry is to be provided by Contractor. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 26 05 00 -1 SECTION 26 05 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS B. Prepare drawings showing proposed rearrangement of Work to meet Project conditions, including changes to Work specified in other Sections. Obtain permission from Architect/Engineer before proceeding as specified under modification procedures. 1.06 MODIFICATION PROCEDURES A. Procedures for modification of Work are specified under the provisions of Section 0120 00. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide Work as required for a complete and operational electrical installation. B. All products shall be designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with industry standards. Standards, organizations, and their abbreviations as used hereafter, include the following: 1. American National Standards Institute, Inc (ANSI). 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 4. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL). C. Install all Work in accordance with the NECA Standard of Installation. IKII W4111111liLIC� A. Submit all requested items in Division 26,27 & 28 Sections under provisions of Section 0160 00. 1.09 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitutions will be considered only as allowed within the provisions of Section 0160 00. 1.10 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Cooperate and assist in the preparation of project record documents under the provisions of Section 0170 00. 1.11 CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES A. Construct Work in sequence with all other trades and Owner's schedule as specified under the provisions of Section 0170 00. B. Prepare Work as specified under the provisions of Section 0170 00. C. Provide cleaning as specified under provisions of Section 0170 00. 1.12 TRENCHING, FILL AND COMPACTION A. Provide trenching, fill and compaction for all work indicated on Drawings and specified in Division 26 sections. Perform work in accordance with Division 31 requirements. 1.13 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. Arrange with utility company and provide temporary lighting and power necessary for building construction and temporary structures. Perform work in accordance with Section 0150 00 requirements. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 260500-2 SECTION 26 05 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 1.14 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION A. Proper project management and coordination is critical for a successful project. Manage and coordinate the Work with all other trades in accordance with Section 0130 00 requirements. Reliance on the Drawings and Specifications only for exact project requirements is insufficient for proper coordination. PART 2 PRODUCTS 11101111=4 PART 3 EXECUTION Not used. END OF SECTION PROJECT N0, 15-172-1017 260500-3 SECTION 26 05 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 26 05 01 MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Electrical demolition. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 0170 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Additional requirements for alterations work. 1.03 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Electrical demolition: Remove electrical systems shown on drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Materials and equipment for patching and extending work: As specified in individual sections. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities. B. Beginning of demolition means installer accepts existing conditions. C. Demolition Drawings are based on casual field observation and are intended to identify the limits of the construction site. Remove all electrical systems in their entirety in proper sequence with the Work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coordinate utility service outages with utility company. B. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during construction. When work must be performed on energized equipment or circuits, use personnel experienced in such operations. C. Existing Electrical Service and Emergency Electrical Service: Maintain existing system in service until new system is complete and ready for service. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Obtain permission from Owner and Architect at least 24 hours before partially or completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area. D. Existing Fire Alarm System: Maintain existing system in service. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Notify Owner, Architect/Engineer and local fire service at least 24 hours before partially or completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 26 05 01-1 SECTION 26 05 01 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION 3.03 DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK A. Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction. B. Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply. C. Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut conduit flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces. D. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets if conduit servicing them is abandoned and removed. Provide blank cover for abandoned outlets that are not removed. E. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work. F. Maintain access to existing electrical installations that remain active. Modify installation or provide access panel as appropriate. G. Relocate existing fire alarm devices affected by wall, ceiling and floor demolition. H. Properly dispose of all ballast to approved ballast recycler. Do not land fill ballasts. END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 26 05 01 -2 SECTION 26 05 01 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION SECTION 26 05 02 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Nameplates and labels. 2. Wire and cable markers. 3. Conduit markers. 4. Underground Warning Tape. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 09 90 00 - Paints and Coatings. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to the requirements of NFPA 70 B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as a suitable for purpose specified as shown. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 NAMEPLATES AND LABELS A. Nameplates: Engraved three -layer laminated plastic, black letters on white background. B. Locations: 1. Each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure. C. Letter Size: 1. Use 1/8 inch letters for identifying individual equipment and loads. 2. Use 1/4 inch letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads. D. Labels: Embossed adhesive tape, with 3/16 inch white letters on a black background. Use only for identification of individual wall switches and receptacles and control device stations. 2.02 WIRE AND CABLE MARKERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Brady Model PCPS. 2. Panduit Model PCM. 3. T & B Model WM. B. Description: Cloth type wire markers. C. Locations: Each conductor at panelboard gutters, pull boxes, and each load connection. D. Legend: PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 26 05 02 -1 SECTION 26 05 02 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 1. Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder number indicated on drawings. 2.03 CONDUIT MARKERS A. Location: Furnish markers for each conduit longer than 6 feet. B. Spacing: 20 feet on center. C. Color: 1. 480 Volt System: Orange 2. 208 Volt System: Black 3. Fire Alarm System: Red. 2.04 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE A. Description: 4 inch wide plastic tape, detectable type, colored red with suitable warning legend describing buried electrical lines. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and labels. 3.02 APPLICATION A. Install nameplate and label parallel to equipment lines. B. Secure nameplate to equipment front using screws. C. Secure nameplates to inside surface of door on panelboard that is recessed in finished locations. D. Identify underground conduits using underground warning tape. Install one tape per trench at 3 inches below finished grade. END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 260502-2 SECTION 26 05 02 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION SECTION 26 0519 CONDUCTORS AND DEVICES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wiring Methods. 2. Wire and Cable 3. Wiring Devices and Wall Plates 4. Large Poke -Through Fittings 5. Pushbuttons. 6. Motion Sensors. 7, Wiring Connections. 8. Cords and Caps. 9. Retractable Cord and Plug Set. 10.Ceiling Fans. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit Under Provisions of Section 0130 00 - Submittals: 1. Product Data: Provide data on wiring devices and cover plates. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as a suitable for purpose specified as shown. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WIRING METHODS A. All locations: Building wire in raceway. B. Use no wire smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits, and no smaller than 14 AWG for control wiring. 1. Use 10 AWG conductor for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuit home runs longer than 100 feet. Use minimum #10 AWG conductor wire in all the following locations: a. All programmable panel branch circuits (larger where indicated). b. All emergency lighting and exit branch circuits. 2.02 WIRE AND CABLE A. Manufacturers: 1. Okonite. 2. Southwire. 3. Collyer. B. Building Wire: PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 2605 19-1 SECTION 26 05 19 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved CONDUCTORS AND DEVICES 1. Feeders and Branch Circuits Larger Than 6 AWG: Copper, stranded conductor, 600 volt insulation. 2. Feeders and Branch Circuits 6 AWG and Smaller: Copper conductor, 600 volt insulation. E and 8 AWG, stranded conductor; smaller than 8 AWG, stranded conductor (solid for device terminations). 3. Control Circuits: Copper, stranded conductor, 600 volt insulation. 4. Use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuits longer than 75 feet. 5. Use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 277 volt branch circuits longer than 200 feet. 6. Use conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits. 7. Use conductor not smaller than 16 AWG for control circuits. C. Locations: 1. Concealed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire with Type THHN insulation in raceway. 2. Exposed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire with Type THHN insulation in raceway. 3. Above Accessible Ceilings: Use only building wire with Type THHN insulation in raceway. 4. Wet or Damp Interior Locations: Use only building wire with Type THWN insulation in raceway. 5. Exterior Locations: Use only building wire with Type XHHW insulation in raceway. 6. Underground Installations: Use only building wire with Type XHHW insulation in raceway. 2.03 WIRING DEVICES AND WALL PLATES A. Single Pole Switch: Specification grade. 1. Hubbell Model 1121. 2. P & S Model 521. 3. Leviton Model 1121. 4. Color: Ivory. B. Three-way Switch: Specification grade. 1. Hubbell Model 1123. 2. P & S Model 523. 3. Leviton Model 1123, 4. Color: Ivory. C. Four-way Switch: Specification grade. 1. Hubbell Model 1124. 2. P & S Model 524. 3. Leviton Model 1124. 4. Color: Ivory. D. Single -pole Key Switch: Specification grade. 1. Hubbell Model 1121-L. 2. P & S Model 521-L. 3. Leviton Model 1121-L. E. Three-way Key Switch: Specification grade. 1. Hubbell Model 1123-L. 2. P & S Model 523-L. 3. Leviton Model 1123-L. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 2605 19-2 SECTION 26 0519 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved CONDUCTORS AND DEVICES F. Four-way Key Switch: Specification grade. 1. Hubbell Model 1124-L. 2. P & S Model 524-L. 3. Leviton Model 1124-L. G. Single -pole Fluorescent Dimmer Switch: Specification grade. 1. Lutron Nova Series or equal. 2. Description: Linear slide fluorescent dimmer, compatible with ballast and number of lamps. 3. Voltage: 277 volt. 4. Power Rating: Match load shown on drawings. H. Momentary Contact (Keyed) Switch 1. Hubbell. 2. P&S. 3. Leviton Model 1257-L. 4. Color: Ivory. I. Momentary Contact Switch 1. Hubbell. 2. P&S. 3. Leviton Model 1257. 4. Color: Ivory. J. Duplex Convenience Receptacle: Nema 5-20R, duplex, specification grade. 1. Hubbell. 2. Bryant. 3. Leviton. 4. Color: Ivory. K. Isolated Ground Duplex Receptacle: Nema 5-20R, duplex, isolated ground, specification grade. 1. Hubbell Model IG -5362. 2. P & S Model IG6300. 3. Leviton Model 5262 -IG. 4. Color: Orange with delta icon. L. GFCI Receptacle: Nema 5-20R, duplex, GFCI, specification grade. 1. Hubbell Model GF -5362. 2. Slater Model SIR -20-F. 3. Eagle Model 647. 4. Color: Ivory. M. Decorative Cover Plate: 1. Hubbell. 2. Bryant. 3. Leviton. 4. Description: Ivory, metal. N. Weatherproof die cast cover. 1. Intermatic Model WP1030MC (Two -Gang). PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 2605 19-3 SECTION 26 0519 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved CONDUCTORS AND DEVICES 2. Approved Equal. 0. Special Purpose Receptacles: 1. Hubbell. 2. P&S, 3. Leviton. 4. Description: Nema configuration as shown on Drawings unless noted otherwise. P. Sink Top "Air" Switch 1. Description: Air activated, counter top mounted button with air tube and dual -outlet control box (mounted below cabinet). 2. Manufacturer: a. In-sink-erator "sink top switch" type. b. Approved equal. 3. Button finish: a. To be selected by architect. 2.04 MOTION SENSORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Leviton 2. Hubbell 3. Approved Equal B. Combination Wall Switch/Occupancy Sensor 1. Dual technology (passive infrared and ultrasonic), 277V sensor with 180degree field-of-view and maximum coverage of 2400 square feet. 2. Manual push button for ON/OFF light switching. 3. Time delay settings: 30 seconds, 10, 20 or 30 minutes). 4. Adjustable Integral blinders. 5. Sensor shall continuously monitor space to identify usage patterns. Unit shall automatically adjust time delay and sensitivity settings for optimal performance and energy efficiency. C. Ceiling Mounted. 1. Dual technology (passive infrared and ultrasonic), 24VDC sensor with unobtrusive appearance and 360 degrees of coverage. a. Provide type/quantity of motion sensors to meet square foot coverage requirements. 2. Provide power pack for 24VDC controls and switching of 120/277V circuits. Minimum quantity of sensors per power pack: 2. 3. Sensor shall continuously monitor space to identify usage patterns. Unit shall automatically adjust time delay and sensitivity settings for optimal performance and energy efficiency. 4. Time delay settings: Auto, fixed (5,10,15,20 or 30 minutes). 5. Sensitivity settings: Auto, reduced sensitivity (passive infrared) variable (ultrasonic). 6. (1) N/0 and (1) N/C output. 2.05 PUSHBUTTONS A. Manufacturers: 1. General Electric C-2000 Series or equal. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 2605 19-4 SECTION 26 0519 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved CONDUCTORS AND DEVICES Description: NEMA ICS -2, 600 volt ac maximum, 10 amperes ac continuous. 1. Emergency Electric Shut Off: Two position maintained push-pull 40mm, round plastic red color in NEMA 1 enclosure. a. Cover Plate: Emergency Stop cover plate, brushed chrome. b. Label: Gas Shut Off. c. Contacts: One normally closed contact, one normally open contact. 2. Laboratory General Exhaust Switch: Multi -function on-off NEMA 1 enclosure, gang with emergency electric shut off pushbutton. a. Cover Plate: Room Exhaust cover plate. b. Label: On/Off. 2.06 LARGE POKE -THROUGH FITTINGS A. Manufacturers: 1. Wiremold Evolution 6AT Series. 2. Approved Equal. B. Description: Recessed mounted Poke-thru with devices as noted on drawings. Provide top guard protection. Poke thru's shall be fire rated. 1. Provide fire stopping as required. 2. Core holes in floor as required. Poke-thru's shall be spaced to maintain structural integrity of the floor. 2.07 WIRING CONNECTIONS: A. Make permanent splice connections to achieve no measurable temperature rise: 1. Wire size up to #6 AWG: Spring wire cap. 2. Over #6 AWG: Crimp type Compression connector. Rubber under wrap with insulated plastic tape over wrap. B. Make terminations to achieve no measurable temperature rise: 1. Wire size up to #6 AWG: Set screw type compression terminal lug. 2. Wire size over #6 AWG: Crimp type compression connector to spade lug. 2.08 CORDS AND CAPS A. Manufacturers: 1. Carol. 2. Substitutions: Or Equal. B. Attachment Plug Construction: Conform to NEMA WD 1. C. Configuration: NEMA WD 6; match receptacle configuration at outlet provided for equipment. D. Cord Construction: ANSI/NFPA 70, Type SO multiconductor flexible cord with identified equipment grounding conductor. E. Cord Construction: ASTM B-8 or B-174, annealed stranded bare copper with PVC insulation and jacket. Resistant to oils, lubricants, water, acids alkalies, ozone or abrasion. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 260519-5 SECTION 26 0519 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved CONDUCTORS AND DEVICES F. Size: Suitable for connected load of equipment, length of cord, and rating of branch circuit overcurrent protection (3 conductor #12 unless otherwise noted.) G. Accessories: Strain -relief at cap and junction box. H. Accessories: Provide cord grip next to ceiling junction box to support cord. Mount cord grip to structure. 2.09 RETRACTABLE CORD AND PLUG SET A. Manufacturers: 1. Appleton. 2. Woodhead. B. Description: Steel spring driven, self -retracting cord and plug set. 1. Cord: Thirty-five (35) foot #12/3 SO Cord. 2. Plug: Nema 5-20R, with strain relief. 3. Support: Fixed, structural support. 4. Accessories: Adjustable retrieval ball stop, intermediate cord hanger. 2.10 CEILING FANS A. Manufacturer: 1. Q -MARK. a. #5630-1RDP. 2. Substitution: Or Approved Equal. B. Description: 1. Heavy-Duty/High Performance Industrial 56" reversible variable speed ceiling fan. C. Motor: Fractional horsepower, direct drive, 18 -pole permanent split capacitor motor with permanently lubricated ball bearings and built-in thermal overload protection. D. Speed Control: Multi -fan solid state speed controller. 1. Q -Mark #12006 or equal. E. Reverse Switch: 1. D.P.D.T. switch. 2. See wiring diagram on details sheet. F. Finish: White epoxy enamel. G. Mounting: Surface, roof truss. H. Voltage: 120 volt. I. Accessory: Fan Guard (Marley #2800-1 or 2800-2), Secondary support chain. 2.11 CEILING FANS A. Manufacturer: 1. Q -MARK a. #36201 PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 260519-6 SECTION 26 05 19 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved CONDUCTORS AND DEVICES 2. Substitution: Or Approved Equal. B. Description: 1. Heavy-Duty/High Performance Industrial 36" reversible variable speed ceiling fan. C. Motor: Fractional horsepower, direct drive, 18 -pole permanent split capacitor motor with permanently lubricated ball bearings and built-in thermal overload protection. D. Speed Control: Multi -fan solid state speed controller. 1. Q -Mark #12006 or equal. E. Reverse Switch: 1. D.P.D.T. switch. 2. See wiring diagram on details sheet. F. Finish: White epoxy enamel. G. Mounting: Surface, roof truss. H. Voltage: 120 volt. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A. Verify that interior of building is physically protected from weather. B. Verify that mechanical work which is likely to injure conductors has been completed. C. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway system before installing conductors. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Neatly train and secure wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards. B. Use wire pulling lubricant for pulling 4 AWG and larger wires. C. Route wire and cable as required to meet project conditions. 1. Wire and cable routing indicated is approximate unless dimensioned. 2. Where wire and cable destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact routing and lengths required. D. Pull all conductors into raceway at same time. E. Protect exposed cable from damage. F. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment and panelboards. G. Support cables above accessible ceilings to keep them from resting on ceiling tiles. H. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors without perceptible temperature rise. I. Use split bolt connectors for copper conductor splices and taps, 6 AWG and larger. Tape uninsulated conductors and connector with electrical tape to 150 percent of insulation rating of conductor. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 260519-7 SECTION 26 0519 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved CONDUCTORS AND DEVICES J. Terminate spare conductors with electrical tape. K. Do not share neutral conductor on load side of dimmers. L. Install wiring devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Install wall switches at height shown on drawings, OFF position down. 2. Install convenience receptacles at height shown on drawings grounding pole on bottom. 3. Install specific purpose receptacles at heights shown on Drawings. M. Install wall plates flush and level. 1. Install decorative plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets in finished areas. 2. Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas, above accessible ceilings, and on surface -mounted outlets. END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 2605 19.8 SECTION 26 05 19 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved CONDUCTORS AND DEVICES SECTION 26 05 29 SUPPORTING DEVICES PART GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Conduit and equipment supports. 2. Anchors and fasteners. il[mj;1=3411I41*` A. NECA - National Contractors Association. B. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS A. Materials and Finishes: Provide adequate corrosion resistance. B. Provide materials, sizes, and types of anchors, fasteners and supports to carry the loads of equipment and conduit. Consider weight of wire in conduit when selecting products. C. Anchors and Fasteners: 1. Concrete Structural Elements: Use expansion anchors. 2. Steel Structural Elements: Use beam clamps. 3. Concrete Surfaces: Use self -drilling anchors and expansion anchors. 4. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Use toggle bolts. 5. Solid Masonry Walls: Use expansion anchors and preset inserts. 6. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws. 7. Wood Elements: Use wood screws. 2.02 RACK CONSTRUCTION A. Manufacturers: 1. UniStrut, 2. B -Line. 3. Caddy. B. Description: 1. Rack: 12 gauge galvanized steel, 15/8" BY 15/8" full, green finish. 2. Spring Steel Clips: Spring or twirl type. 3. Pipe Clamp: Conduit clamp, match with rack. 4. Threaded rod and hardware: Plated finish, size and length as required for loading and conditions. A. Manufacturers: 1. Minerrallac Electric Company. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 260529- 1 SECTION 26 05 29 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC., All Rights Reserved SUPPORTING DEVICES 2. Substitutions: Or Approved Equal. B. Description: 1. Standard conduit hanger, zinc -plated steel with bolts. 2. Threaded rod and hardware: Plated finish, size and length as required for loading and conditions. 2.04 BEAM CLAMPS A. Manufacturers: 1. Appleton. 2. Midwest. 3. Raco. B. Description: Malleable beam clamp, zinc plated steel. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide anchors, fasteners, and supports in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation". C. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, and conduit. D. Do not use powder -actuated anchors. E. Do not drill or cut structural members. F. Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel. Rigidly weld members or use hexagon head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Use spring lock washers under all nuts. G. Install surface -mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors. H. In wet and damp locations use steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards one inch off wall. I. Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and panelboards recessed in hollow partitions. END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 260529-2 SECTION 26 05 29 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SUPPORTING DEVICES SECTION 26 05 35 RACEWAYS AND BOXES 17-11TRIEW V14I7e1� 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Raceway Requirements. 2. Metallic Conduit and Fittings. 3. Nonmetallic Tubing. 4. Electrical Boxes. 5. Directional Boring. 6. Pedestal Enclosure. 7. Electrical Floor Boxes. 8. Multi -Service Steel Recessed Floor Box 9. Electrical Ceiling Boxes. 10.Penetration Sealants. 11. Surface Metallic Raceway. 12. Low Profile Surface Metallic Raceway. 13.Surface Nonmetallic Raceway. 14.Pop-Open Enclosure. 15. Hand Holes. 16. Wireway. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 1. ANSI C80.1 - Specification for Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc -Coated. 2. ANSI C80.3 - Specification for Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc -Coated. B. ANSI/NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable Assemblies. C. NECA "Standard of Installation" D. Underwriter's Laboratory Fire Resistance Directory 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Install all raceways in accordance with applicable building codes and NECA "Standard of Installation." 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit intended routing of all conduits exposed in rooms or under slab. Due to the exposed nature of this Work, careful lay -out procedures are necessary to provide an acceptable aesthetic appearance and to avoid crossing of conduits. B. Submit Under Provisions of Section 0178 00 - Contract Closeout: 1. Project Record Documents: a. Accurately record actual locations and mounting heights of outlet, pull, and junction boxes. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 26 05 35 -1 SECTION 26 05 35 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC., All Rights Reserved RACEWAYS AND BOXES b. Accurately record re -arrangement of panel schedule at panelboards. c. Accurately record within a tolerance of 6 inches the location of all conduits greater than 3/4" trade size, all conduit homeruns, all underground and all in -slab conduits. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings. B. Verify routing and termination locations of conduit prior to rough -in. C. Conduit routing is shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route as required to complete wiring system. D. Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Install at locations required for box to serve intended purpose. Include in base bid, installation within 10 feet of location shown. 1.06 TRENCHING, FILL AND COMPACTION A. Provide trenching, fill and compaction for all work indicated on Drawings and specified in Division 26 sections. B. Delegated Engineering Responsibility: The Contractor shall employ experienced horizontal directional drilling personnel familiar with local conditions and City of St. Charles Electrical Department requirements. Contractor shall be responsible for selection of drilling equipment, drilling fluids, drilling operations, location and tacking instrumentation, ream and pull back procedures. 1.07 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. Arrange with utility company and provide temporary lighting and power necessary for building continued operations and construction use. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 RACEWAY REQUIREMENTS A. Use only specified raceway in the following locations: 1. Branch Circuits and Feeders: a. Concealed Dry Interior Locations: Electrical metallic tubing. b. Exposed Dry Interior Finished Locations: Electrical metallic tubing. c. Exposed Dry Interior Unfinished Locations: Electrical metallic tubing. d. Utility Primary and Site Lighting: Sch 40 PVC, concrete encased under road ways and parking lots. a) Transition to galvanized rigid metallic conduit at transformer pad and utility pole locations. b) Conduit Fittings: NEMA TC 9 c) Product: As approved by Utility Company (Commonwealth Edison Company). e. All other locations: Galvanized Rigid Metallic Conduit. B. Size raceways for conductor type installed. 1. Minimum Size Conduit Homerun to Panelboard: 314 -inch. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 260535-2 SECTION 26 05 35 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved RACEWAYS AND BOXES 2.02 METALLIC CONDUIT AND FITTINGS A. Conduit: 1. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1. 2. Electrical metallic tubing: ANSI C80.3. 3. Flexible Conduit: UL 1, zinc -coated steel. a. Liquidtight Flexible Conduit: UL360. Fittings shall be specifically approved for use with this raceway. B. Conduit Fittings: 1. Metal Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1. a. EMT fittings: Use set -screw indentor-type fittings. 2.03 NONMETALLIC TUBING A. Manufacturers: 1. Carlon Co. 2. LCP National Plastics, Inc. 3. Pacific Western Extruded Plastics Co. B. Description: UL651A "Type EB and A PVC Conduit and HDPE Conduit." 1. Conduit: Schedule 40. Suitable for exposure to sunlight and direct burial. 2.04 ELECTRICAL BOXES A. Manufacturers: 1. Raco. 2. Steel City. 3. Appleton. 4. Substitutions: Or Approved Equal. B. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: ANSI/NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel, suitable for installation in masonry: C. Equipment Support Boxes: Rated for weight of equipment supported; include 2 inch male fixture studs where required. D. Wet Location Outlet Boxes: Cast aluminum: Cast alloy, deep type, gasket cover, threaded hubs. 2.05 POP -OPEN ENCLOSURE A. Manufacturers: 1. FSR 2. Hubbell 3. Wiremold B. Description 1. Recessed table top enclosure with pop -open cover. 2. (1) Double duplex receptacle. 3. Up to 8 Communications devices. 4. Can be installed in any table surface with thickness ranging from .75" to 2.75' PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 260535-3 SECTION 26 05 35 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved RACEWAYS AND BOXES C. Cover: 1. Flush type. 2. Color as selected by Architect. 2.06 PEDESTAL ENCLOSURE A. Manufacturers: 1. Hubbell. 2. Wiremold. 3. Approved Equal. B. Description: 1. Above Counter service pedestal. 2. Metallic with aluminum frame and brushed aluminum housing. 3. Up to either (2) duplex receptacles (one on each side of pedestal), (2) GFCI duplex receptacles (one on each side of pedestal) or (8) communications devices (four on each side of pedestal). 4. Bottom of enclosure shall be mounted to counter (stem mounting not acceptable). C. Cover: 1. Stainless steel. 2.07 ELECTRICAL FLOOR BOXES A. Manufacturers: 1. Hubbell. 2. Appleton. 3. Walker. B. Concrete floor slab: Fully adjustable, stamped steel, 3" deep, two compartment (power/data), recessed flip top cover service box style floor box. C. Provide surface mounted ("dog house" type) service fittings where called out on drawings. 1. Service fitting shall: a. accept up to (2)1" locking nipples. b. have interchangeable faceplates. D. Cafeteria: Fully adjustable, cast iron, 4" deep, brass screw covers with threaded brass protective rings for plugs (mechanical/wet mop protection). 2.08 MULTI -SERVICE STEEL RECESSED FLOOR BOXES A. Manufacturers 1. Hubbell Wiring Devices - Kellems - www.hubbell-wiring.com 2. Thomas & Betts Corporation - www.tnb.com 3. The Wiremold Company - www.wiremold.com B. Description: 1. Recessed type. 2. Provide capacity of up to six duplex receptacles and/or communication services. 3. Fully adjustable before concrete pour. 4. Openings for up to (4) 1" conduits and (4) 3/4" conduits. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 260535-4 SECTION 26 05 35 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved RACEWAYS AND BOXES C. Flush Cover and Flange Assembly: 1. Steel Cover with Carpet Flange Assembly, 2. Cover shall provide protection from water, dirt and debris. 3. Cover shall close completely when plugs are connected into receptacles and/or communications jacks. D. Backbox dimensions (minimum). 1. 10" Length x 10" Width x 3" Depth. 2.09 ELECTRICAL CEILING BOXES. A. Manufacturers: 1. Panduit. 2. Leviton. 3. Walker. B. Description: Two gang, separated power/data surface metallic box. Combination duplex receptacle with two port data faceplate, compatible with data jacks. Ivory. 2.10 PENETRATION SEALANTS A. Fire -rated assemblies: Provide firestopping of all penetrations made by Work under this Contract in accordance with provisions of Section 07 84 00 requirements. B. Thermal and Moisture Protection: Provide thermal and moisture protection made by Work under this Contract of all exterior wall, floor and roof penetrations in accordance with Division 7 requirements. 2.11 TWO CELL SURFACE METALLIC RACEWAY A. Manufacturer: 1. Wiremold G-4000 Series or equal. B. Description: UL -5, 4-3/4 inches wide by 1-3/4 inches height, two channel galvanized steel, combination power/data. C. Finish: Painted, ANSI 61 Gray. D. Accessories: Transition fittings, divider plates, device mounting straps, couplings, combination power/data cover plates, end plates and all other accessories necessary for a complete system in locations indicated on Drawings. 2.12 TWO CELL LOW PROFILE SURFACE METALLIC RACEWAY A. Manufacturer: 1. Wiremold 2400 Series or equal. B. Description: UL -5, 2 inches wide by 1 inch height, two channel galvanized steel, combination power/data. C. Finish: Painted, ANSI 61 Color Selected by architect. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 260535-5 SECTION 26 05 35 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC., All Rights Reserved RACEWAYS AND BOXES D. Accessories: Transition fittings, divider plates, device mounting straps, couplings, combination power/data cover plates, end plates and all other accessories necessary for a complete system in locations indicated on Drawings. 2.13 TWO CELL SURFACE NON-METALLIC RACEWAY A. Manufacturer: 1. Wiremold 5400 Series or equal. B. Description: UL -5A, 5-1/4 inches wide by 1-3/4 inches height, two channel with individual (twin snap) compartment covers, combination power/data. C. Finish: White. D. Accessories: Transition fittings, divider plates, device mounting straps, couplings, combination power/data cover plates, end plates and all other accessories necessary for a complete system in locations indicated on Drawings. 2.14 POP -OPEN ENCLOSURE A. Manufacturers 1. FSR #T3U-3R - fsrinc.com 2. No Substitutions. B. Description 1. Recessed table top enclosure with pop -open cover. 2. Provide double duplex receptacle. 3. Provide space for data jack where required. C. Flush Cover: 1. Finish to be selected by Architect. 2.15 HAND HOLES A. Manufacturers: 1. Quazite. 2. Approved Equal B. Description: Precast polymer concrete or precast concrete, Non-conductive, non-flammable with open bottom. Flanged, non-conductive, gasketed cover enclosure with stainless-steel cover screws. 1. Load Rating: UL listed Tier 22 as suitable for driveway, parking lot and off -roadway applications subject to occasional non -deliberate heavy vehicular traffic. 2. Cover inscribed with or "ELECTRIC' or other suitable description. 2.16 WIREWAY A. Manufacturers: 1. Hoffman. 2. Cooper Industries. 3. Approved Equal. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 260535-6 SECTION 26 05 35 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved RACEWAYS AND BOXES B. Description: 1. NEMA Type 1 Lay -In Galvanized Wireway, UL 870. Flat cover design. Size as shown on drawings. 2. Provide hinged covers where noted on drawings. 3. Provide all elbows, tee's, covers and fittings as required C. Finish: 1. To be selected by Architect/Engineer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A. Verify that interior of building is physically protected from weather. B. Verify that mechanical work which is likely to injure conductors has been completed. C. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway system before installing conductors. D. Verify that supporting surfaces are ready to receive work. E. Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings, in approximate locations, unless dimensioned. 1. Obtain verification from Architect/Engineer for locations of outlets throughout prior to rough -in. F. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive wire markers. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and to present neat appearance. 1. Route raceway parallel and perpendicular to walls and adjacent piping. 2. Maintain minimum 6 inch clearance to piping and 12 inch clearance to heat surfaces such as flues and heating appliances. 3. Maintain required fire, acoustic, and vapor barrier rating when penetrating walls, floors, and ceilings. 4. Use conduit hangers and clamps; do not fasten with wire or perforated pipe straps. 5. Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction. 6. Terminate conduit stubs with insulated bushings. 7. Use suitable caps to protect installed raceway against entrance of dirt and moisture. 8. Install expansion joints where raceway crosses building expansion joints. B. Install electrical boxes as shown on the drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections and regulatory requirements. 1. Locate and install electrical boxes to allow access. Provide access panels if required. 2. Locate and install electrical boxes to maintain headroom and to present neat mechanical appearance. 3. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings or in unfinished areas. 4. Provide knockout closures for unused openings. 5. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets above counters, benches, backsplashes and furniture. C. Use recessed outlet boxes in finished areas and where indicated. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 260535-7 SECTION 26 05 35 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved RACEWAYS AND BOXES 1. Secure boxes to interior wall and partition studs, accurately positioning to allow for surface finish thickness. 2. Use stamped steel stud bridges for flush outlets in hollow stud wall, and adjustable steel channel fasteners for flush ceiling outlet boxes. 3. Locate boxes in masonry walls to require cutting corner only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat openings for boxes. 4. Do not install boxes back-to-back in walls; provide 6 inches separation, minimum; except provide 24 inches separation, minimum in acoustic -rated walls. 5. Do not damage insulation. D. Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of walls, floors, partitions and other elements, using materials and methods recognized by Underwriters Laboratory Fire Resistance Directory. E. Provide anchors, fasteners, and supports in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation". F. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, and conduit. G. Do not use powder -actuated anchors. K Cut or core structural members and thermal and moisture barriers only upon receiving permission from Architect. Each Contractor shall be responsible for making necessary penetrations for the completion of it's Work. Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel. Rigidly weld members or use hexagon head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Use spring lock washers under all nuts. J. Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and panelboards recessed in hollow partitions. END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 260535-8 SECTION 26 05 35 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved RACEWAYS AND BOXES SECTION 26 2100 LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Electrical service requirements. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 0519 - Conductors and Devices B. Section 26 05 29 - Supporting Devices C. Section 26 05 35 - Raceway and Boxes D. Section 26 2413 - Sedvice and Distribution E. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems, F. Section 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. G. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. H. Section 3123 16.13 - Trenching: Excavating, bedding, and backfilling. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Service Point: The point of connection between the facilities of the serving utility and the premises wiring as defined in NFPA 70, and as designated by the Utility Company. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. IEEE C2 - National Electrical Safety Code; 2012. B. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010. C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. 1.05 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. No later than two weeks following date of the Agreement, notify Utility Company of anticipated date of service. Coordination: 1. Verify the following with Utility Company representative: a. Utility Company requirements, including division of responsibility. b. Exact location and details of utility point of connection. c. Utility easement requirements. d. Utility Company charges associated with providing service. 2. Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of other utilities or obstructions within the spaces dedicated for electrical service and associated equipment. 3. Coordinate arrangement of service entrance equipment with the dimensions and clearance requirements of the actual equipment to be installed. PROJECT NO. 15.172-1017 26 21 00 -1 SECTION 26 2100 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE 4. Notify Architect/Engineer of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work. C. Arrange for Utility Company to provide permanent electrical service. Prepare and submit documentation required by Utility Company. D. Utility Company charges associated with providing permanent service to be paid by Owner. E. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week prior to commencing work of this section to review service requirements and details with Utility Company representative. Scheduling: 1. Where work of this section involves interruption of existing electrical service, arrange service interruption with Owner. 2. Arrange for inspections necessary to obtain Utility Company approval of installation. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Utility Company letter of availability for providing electrical service to project. C. Shop Drawings: Include dimensioned plan views and sections indicating locations and arrangement of Utility Company and service entrance equipment, metering provisions, required clearances, and proposed service routing. 1. Obtain Utility company approval of shop drawings prior to submittal. D. Drawings prepared by Utility Company. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with the following: 1. IEEE C2 (National Electrical Safety Code). 2. NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code). 3. The requirements of the Utility Company. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 ELECTRICAL SERVICE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide new electrical service consisting of all required conduits, conductors, equipment, metering provisions, supports, accessories, etc. as necessary for connection between Utility Company point of supply and service entrance equipment. B. Electrical Service Characteristics: As indicated on drawings. C. Division of Responsibility: 1. Pad -Mounted Utility Transformers: a. Transformer Pads: Furnished and installed by Contractor per Utility Company requirements. b. Transformers: Furnished and installed by Utility Company. c. Transformer Grounding Provisions: Furnished and installed by Contractor per Utility Company requirements. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 262100-2 SECTION 26 2100 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC., All Rights Reserved LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE d. Primary: a) Trenching and Backfilling: Provided by Contractor. b) Conduits: Furnished and installed by Contractor. c) Conductors: Furnished and installed by Utility Company. e. Secondary: a) Trenching and Backfilling: Provided by Contractor. b) Conduits: Furnished and installed by Contractor. c) Conductors: Furnished and installed by Contractor (Service Point at transformer). 2. Terminations at Service Point: Provided by Utility Company. 3. Metering Provisions: a. Meter Bases: Furnished and installed by Contractor per Utility Company requirements. b. Metering Transformer Cabinets: Furnished and installed by Contractor per Utility Company requirements. c. Metering Transformers: Furnished and installed by Utility Company. d. Conduits Between Metering Transformers and Meters: Furnished and installed by Contractor per Utility Company requirements. e. Wiring Between Metering Transformers and Meters: Furnished and installed by Utility Company. D. Products Furnished by Contractor: Comply with Utility Company requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on drawings. B. Verify that ratings and configurations of service entrance equipment are consistent with the indicated requirements. C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.02 PREPARATION 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and Utility Company requirements. B. Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1. C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances and required maintenance access. D. Provide required trenching and backfilling in accordance with Section 31 2316.13. E. Provide directional boring of utility conduits in accordance with Section 26 05 35. F. Provide required support and attachment components in accordance with Section 26 05 29. G. Provide grounding and bonding for service entrance equipment in accordance with Section 26 05 26, PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 262100-3 SECTION 26 2100 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE H. Identify service entrance equipment, including main service disconnect(s) in accordance with Section 26 05 53. END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 262100-4 SECTION 26 2100 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE SECTION 26 2413 SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION I]e1:ifiWe341l4X'" 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Main Switchboard Modifications (Relabeled DP -1). 2. Lighting and Appliance Panelboard. 3. Distribution Switchboards. 4. Portable Generator Plug Connector, 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Electric Service System: Existing multiple point (two) service entrance locations (modified). 277/480 volts, three phase, four wire, 60 Hz wye. Underground service with secondary metering. B. Grounding Electrode System: 1. Metal underground water pipe. 2. Rod electrode. 3. Metal frame of building. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit Under Provisions of Division 01 - Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: Indicate relevant information on panelboards, switchboards, custom sections and devices. 2. Product Data: Provide data on enclosed switches and circuit breakers, fuses and Panelboard circuit breakers. a. For circuit breakers feeding transformers, provide circuit breaker time -current curves overlayed with transformer inrush, FLA and primary/secondary thermal limit curves. 3. Test Reports: Submit for field inspection and testing. Include description of procedures, duration, instruments used, and test values obtained. Present information in table comparing acceptable values to actual values: a. Indicate overall resistance to ground and resistance of each electrode. b. Indicate final phase balance values for all panelboards, including neutral. 4. Operating and Maintenance Instructions: a. Panelboard: Submit NEMA PB 2.1. B. Submit Under Provisions of Section 01780 - Contract Closeout: 1. Test Reports: Submit for field inspection and testing. Include description of procedures, duration, instruments used, and test values obtained. Present information in table comparing acceptable values to actual values. a. Indicate overall resistance to ground and resistance of each electrode. b. Indicate final phase balance values for all panelboards, including neutral. 2. Operating and Maintenance Instructions: a. Panelboard: Submit NEMA PB 2.1. 3. Project Record Documents: a. Accurately record actual locations of grounding electrodes. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 2624 13-1 SECTION 26 24 13 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION b. Record actual locations of Panelboards, indicate actual branch circuit arrangement. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Ground System Resistance: 5 ohms. B. Phase balance per panelboard: 10 percent. C. All panelboards shall be of same manufacturer for ease of future maintenance. 1.05 REFERENCES A. NECA (National Electrical Contractors Association) "Standard of Installation." B. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards. C. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed Switches. D. NEMA PB 1.1- Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less. 1.06 EQUIPMENT PADS A. Electrical Equipment Pads: Equipment pads shall be provided for all free standing equipment. The Electrical Contractor shall coordinate each pad requirement including dimensions, leave -out and sleeve requirements. B. Utility Transformer: Utility transformer pad shall be provided by General Contractor in accordance with utility company's requirements. Electrical Contractor shall provide conduits, 4 -point perimeter grounding loop with compartment grounding interconnects in accordance with utility company requirements. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MAIN SWITCHBOARD MODIFICATIONS (DP -1) A. Existing Conditions: 1. Existing Switchboard : ITE Imperial Corporation UniPower Switchboard. 2. Shop Order Number: 13-86328-430 3. Date: 11!6/1974 B. Manufacturers: Manufacturer or Underwriter's Laboratory -approved custom switchboard manufacturer. C. Description: Custom 1600 ampere, horizontal through bus sections with custom bus details to connect into existing switchboard bus. Demolish metering, grounding and main device interior components. 1. Enclosure: Existing NEMA 1 enclosure to be reused with new custom closure panels and UL label. 2. AIC Rating: 42,000 symmetrical amperes. 3. Connections: Bolted bus connections, terminal lug connections in main section. 2.02 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS A. Manufacturers: PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 262413-2 SECTION 26 24 13 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION 1. Square D. 2. General Electric. 3. Siemens. 4. Substitutions: Or Approved Equal. B. Lighting and Appliance Panelboards: NEMA PB 1; lighting and appliance circuit breaker type panelboard: 1. Description: As scheduled on Drawings. 2. Provide terminals rated and U.L. listed for use with 75 degrees C temperature rated conductors. 3. Bussing: Shall be copper (all phases, neutral and ground) 4. Breakers: As scheduled on Drawings and specified hereafter. a. Lighting: SWD and HID. b. Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning: HACR rated. 5. Breaker Accessories: As scheduled on Drawings 2.03 DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS A. Manufacturers: 1. Square D. 2. General Electric. 3. Siemens. 4. Substitutions: Or Approved Equal. B. Main Service Entrance Switchboards Description: NEMA PB -2, UL891, group mounted, class 1, front accessible with zero sequence ground fault detection, NEMA 4 enclosure, service entrance rated. Refer to panel schedule and Drawings for further information. 1. Section 1: Current Transformer Cabinet: a. Utility: Commonwealth Edison Co. approved, with NEMA 4 CECHA approved meter fitting and control wiring. Suitable for current transformers as indicated on Drawings. Locate meter fitting at building exterior. 2. Accessibility: Front accessible only. C. Description: NEMA PB -2, UL891, group mounted, class 1, front accessible, floor mounted. Refer to panel schedules for further information. 1. Distribution Switchboards shall be a minimum of 30" wide. D. Bussing: Shall be copper (all phases, neutral and ground). E. Bus Connections: Bolted, accessible from front for maintenance. F. Ground Bus: Extend length of switchboard. G. Breakers: Provide fixed thermal magnetic trip molded case breakers branch devices as indicated on Drawings and scheduled at the end Section. H. Concrete Curb: Provide concrete curb for free standing equipment. 2.04 PORTABLE GENERATOR PLUG CONNECTOR A. Manufacturers: PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 2624 13-3 SECTION 26 24 13 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION 1. Emerson Appleton Powertite 2. ABB Russell Stoll Maxgard Interconnection System 3. Or Approved Equal B. Description: UL 1686 compliant configuration, UL 1682 female receptacle with matching plug mate. Pin and Sleet Power Connector. Angular adapter with junction box, body, pin and sleeve, portable connector suitable for exterior (NEMA 4X) applications and standard service. C. Housing: Cast Aluminum, 31 /4" ID Bushing, nominal with closure cap. D. Ratings: 1. Voltage: 277/480 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire + ground. 600 Volt RMS Maximum Working Voltage. 2. Ampacity: 400 amperes per cable connection. Certified for current interruption at full rated current. Multiple cable connectors as indicated 3. Lug Capacity: 600 kCMIL. 2.05 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS A. Manufacturers: 1. Square D. 2. General Electric. 3. Siemens. 4. Substitutions: Or Approved Equal. B. Distribution Panelboard Description: NEMA PB -1, Wall mounted , front accessible, ampere and voltage ratings as noted, NEMA 1 enclosure. Refer to panel schedule and Drawings for further information. 1. Distribution Panelboards shall be a minimum of 30" wide. C. Breakers: Provide fixed thermal magnetic trip molded case breakers branch devices as indicated on Drawings and scheduled at the end Section. D. Bussing: Shall be copper (all phases, neutral and ground). PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A. Make arrangements with Utility Company to obtain permanent electric service to the Project. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Apply adhesive tag on inside door of each fused switch indicating NEMA fuse class and size installed. C. Install panelboards to NEMA PB 1.1. D. Provide typed or neatly handwritten circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard. Revise directory to reflect circuiting changes required to balance phase loads. E. Provide engraved plastic nameplates. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 262413-4 SECTION 26 2413 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION F. Provide spare conduits out of each recessed panelboard to an accessible location above ceiling. Identify each as SPARE. G. Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder; rearrange circuits in the panelboard to balance the phase loads to within 20 percent of each other. Maintain proper phasing for multi -wire branch circuits. H. Service equipment must be legibly field -marked with the maximum available fault current, including the date the fault current calculation was performed and be of sufficient durability to withstand the environment involved. Field mark electrical equipment to warn qualified persons on the danger of electric are flash. The field -marking must be clearly visible to qualified persons before they inspect or work on the equipment. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect grounding and bonding system conductors and connections for tightness and proper installation. B. Measure ground resistance from system neutral connection at service entrance to convenient ground reference point by passing minimum current of 10 amperes DC and measuring voltage drop. Maximum resistance: 5 ohms. C. Measure primary and secondary transformer voltages and make appropriate tap adjustments. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean equipment finishes to remove paint and concrete splatters. END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 2624 13-5 SECTION 26 2413 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION SECTION 26 3213 ENGINE GENERATORS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Packaged engine generator system and associated components and accessories: 1. Engine and engine accessory equipment. 2. Alternator (generator). 3. Generator set control system. 4. Generator set enclosure. 5. Maintenance cable tap lugs for temporary generator at output. 6. Remote annunciator panels. B. Modification to existing Engineer generator set: 1. Remote annunciator panel and control wiring. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast -in -Place Concrete: Concrete equipment pads. B. Section 2210 05 - Plumbing Piping: Gas piping. C. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. D. Section 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. E. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. F. Section 26 36 00 - Transfer Switches. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010. B. NECA/EGSA 404 - Standard for Installing Generator Sets; 2014. C. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; 2014. D. NFPA 30 - Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code; 2015. E. NFPA 37 - Standard for the Installation and Use of Stationary Combustion Engines and Gas Turbines; 2015. F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. G. NFPA 110 - Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems; 2013. H. UL 1236 - Battery Chargers for Charging Engine -Starter Batteries; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. I. UL 2200 - Stationary Engine Generator Assemblies; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 26 3213 -1 SECTION 26 3213 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved ENGINE GENERATORS J. ANSI/NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI/NEMA MG 1, "Motors and Generators", and MG 2, "Safety Standard for Construction and Guide for Selection, Installation and Use of Electric Motors and Generators". Transfer switches shall comply with ICS 2. K. IEEE Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of IEEE Std. 241, "IEEE Requirements Practice for Electric Power Systems in Commercial Buildings" pertaining to standby power. L. IEEE Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of IEEE Standard 241, "IEEE Recommended Practice for Electric Power Systems in Commercial Buildings" pertaining to standby power. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 1. Coordinate compatibility of generator sets to be installed with work provided under other sections or by others. a. Transfer Switches: See Section 26 36 00. 2. Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of ductwork, piping, equipment or other potential obstructions within the spaces dedicated for engine generator system. 3. Coordinate arrangement of equipment with the dimensions and clearance requirements of the actual equipment to be installed. 4. Coordinate the work to provide electrical circuits suitable for the power requirements of the actual auxiliary equipment and accessories to be installed. 5. Notify ArchitecUEngineer of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work. B. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section; require attendance of all affected installers. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for each product, including ratings, configurations, dimensions, finishes, weights, service condition requirements, and installed features. Include alternator starting capabilities, engine fuel consumption rates, and cooling, combustion air, and exhaust requirements. 1. Include generator set sound level test data. 2. Include characteristic trip curves for overcurrent protective devices upon request. 3. Include alternator thermal damage curve upon request. 4. Provide data showing internal wiring diagrams for engine, generator, control panel, battery, battery rack, battery charger, exhaust silencer, vibration isolators and remote radiator (if provided). C. Shop Drawings: Include dimensioned plan views and sections indicating locations of system components, required clearances, and field connection locations. Include system interconnection schematic diagrams showing all factory and field connections. D. Evidence of qualifications for installer. E. Evidence of qualifications for maintenance contractor (if different entity from installer). PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 26 32 13-2 SECTION 26 3213 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved ENGINE GENERATORS F. Manufacturer's factory emissions certification. G. Source quality control test reports. H. Provide NFPA 110 required documentation from manufacturer where requested by authorities having jurisdiction, including but not limited to: 1. Certified prototype tests. 2. Torsional vibration compatibility certification. 3. NFPA 110 compliance certification. 4. Certified rated load test at rated power factor. I. Manufacturer's detailed field testing procedures. J. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include detailed information on system operation, equipment programming and setup, replacement parts, and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals. 1. Include contact information for entity that will be providing contract maintenance and trouble call-back service. K. Executed Warranty: Submit documentation of final executed warranty completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. L. Maintenance contracts. M. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of system components, installed circuiting arrangements and routing, and final equipment settings. 1. Accurately record location of engine generator and mechanical and electrical connections. N. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2. Furnish one set of tools required for preventative maintenance of the engine generator system. Package tools in adequately sized metal tool box. 3. Provide two additional sets of each fuel, oil, and air filter element required for the engine generator system. 0. Product Data: Provide data showing dimensions, weights, ratings, interconnection points, and internal wiring diagrams for engine, generator, control panel, battery, battery rack, battery charger, exhaust silencer, vibration isolators and remote radiator. P. Maintenance Data: Include instructions for routine maintenance requirements, service manuals for engine and, oil sampling and analysis for engine wear, and emergency maintenance procedures. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with the following: 1. NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code). 2. NFPA 110 (Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems). 3. NFPA 37 (Standard for the Installation and Use of Stationary Combustion Engines and Gas Turbines). PROJECT NO. 15-112-1011 2632 13-3 SECTION 26 3213 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved ENGINE GENERATORS B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements. C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1. Authorized service facilities located within 50 miles of project site. D. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years documented experience with engine generator systems of similar size, type, and complexity; manufacturer's authorized installer. E. Maintenance Contractor Qualifications: Same entity as installer or different entity with specified qualifications. 1. Contract maintenance office located within 200 miles of project site. F. Products: Listed, classified, and labeled by Underwriter's Laboratories Inc. (UL) or testing firm acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose indicated. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store generator sets in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NECA/EGSA 404. B. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic. C. Handle carefully in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to avoid damage to generator set components, enclosure, and finish. D. Accept packaged engine generator set and accessories on site in crates and verify damage. E. Protect equipment from dirt and moisture by securely wrapping in heavy plastic. 1.08 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00 -Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide minimum one year manufacturer warranty covering repair or replacement due to defective materials or workmanship. 1.09 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Furnish service and maintenance of packaged engine generator system for one year from Date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Packaged Engine Generator Set: 1. Caterpillar Inc: www.cat.com. 2. Cummins Power Generation Inc: www.cumminspower.com. 3. Generac Power Systems: www.generac.com/industrial. 4. Kohler Co: www.kohlerpower.com. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 263213-4 SECTION 26 3213 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved ENGINE GENERATORS B. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. 2.02 PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEM A. Provide new engine generator system consisting of all required equipment, sensors, conduit, boxes, wiring, piping, supports, accessories, system programming, etc. as necessary for a complete operating system that provides the functional intent indicated. System Description: 1. Application: Emergency/standby. 2. Configuration: Single packaged engine generator set operated independently (not in parallel). C. Packaged Engine Generator Set: 1. Type: Gaseous (spark ignition). 2. Power Rating: As indicated on drawings, standby. 3. Voltage: As indicated on drawings. 4. Main Line Circuit Breaker: a. Type: Thermal magnetic. b. Trip Rating: As indicated on drawings. c. Features: a) Maintenance Cable Tap. b) Lock -out, Tag -out Provisions. D. Generator Set General Requirements: 1. Prototype tested in accordance with NFPA 110 for Level 1 systems. 2. Factory -assembled, with components mounted on suitable base. 3. List and label engine generator assembly as complying with UL 2200. 4. Power Factor: Unless otherwise indicated, specified power ratings are at 0.8 power factor for three phase voltages and 1.0 power factor for single phase voltages. 5. Provide suitable guards to protect personnel from accidental contact with rotating parts, hot piping, and other potential sources of injury. 6. Main Line Circuit Breakers: Provide factory -installed line side connections with suitable lugs for load side connections. a. NEMA AB 1 molded case circuit breaker on generator output with integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole; sized in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 70. Include battery -voltage operated shunt trip, connection to open circuit breaker on engine failure. Mount unit in enclosure to meet ANSI/NEMA 250 requirements. E. Service Conditions: Provide engine generator system and associated components suitable for operation under the service conditions at the installed location. F. Starting and Load Acceptance Requirements: 1. Cranking Method: Cycle cranking complying with NFPA 110 (15 second crank period, followed by 15 second rest period, with cranking limiter time-out after 3 cycles), unless otherwise required. 2. Cranking Limiter Time -Out: If generator set fails to start after specified cranking period, indicate overcrank alarm condition and lock -out generator set from further cranking until manually reset. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 2632 13-5 SECTION 26 3213 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved ENGINE GENERATORS 3. Start Time: Capable of starting and achieving conditions necessary for load acceptance within 10 seconds (NFPA 110, Type 10). 4. Maximum Load Step: Supports 100 percent of rated load in one step. G. Exhaust Emissions Requirements: 1. Comply with federal (EPA), state, and local regulations applicable at the time of commissioning; include factory emissions certification with submittals. 2. Do not make modifications affecting generator set factory emissions certification without approval of manufacturer and Engineer. Where such modifications are made, provide field emissions testing as necessary for certification. H. Sound Level Requirements: 1. Do not exceed 64 dBA when measured at 23 feet from generator set in free field (no sound barriers) while operating at full load; include manufacturer's sound data with submittals. I. System Capacity: As noted on drawings at elevation of 700 feet above sea level, continuous rating using engine -mounted radiator. J. Engine Accessories: Lube oil filter, intake air filter, lube oil cooler, gear -driven water pump. Include fuel pressure gage, water temperature gage, and lube oil pressure gage on engine -generator control panel. K. Coolant heater: Engine mounted, thermostatically controlled, water jacket heater. The heater shall be sized as recommended by the equipment supplier. Heater voltage shall be as required. L. Mounting: Provide unit with suitable spring -type vibration isolators and mount on structural steel base and concrete pad. M. Exerciser Clock: Provide solid state exerciser clock to set the day, time, and duration of generator set exercise/test period. Provide without load selector switch for the exercise period. N. Maintenance cable lugs: Provide lug connection for portable generator during maintenance periods with lock -out, tag -out provisions at generator breaker assembly. 2.03 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide automatic transfer switches of one of the following: 1. Automatic Switch Company. 2. Kohler Company. 3. Cummins. B. Switch Ratings: Voltage, poles and size as shown on drawings, NEMA 1 type enclosure, switch. C. Testing: Certified laboratory test data on a switch of the same design and rating shall be provided to confirm the following switching abilities: D. Overload and endurance per Tables 21.2 and 23.2 of UL -1008 when enclosed according to Paragraph 1.6. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 263213-6 SECTION 26 3213 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved ENGINE GENERATORS E. Temperature rise tests after the overload and endurance tests to confirm the ability of the transfer switches to carry their rated current within the allowable temperature limits of the insulation in contact with current carrying parts. F. No welding of contacts. Transfer switch must be operable to alternate source after the withstand current tests. G. Dielectric tests at 1960 volts, rms, minimum after the withstand current test. H. The complete automatic transfer switch shall be tested to ensure proper operation of the individual components and correct overall sequence of operation and to ensure that the operating transfer time, voltage, frequency and time delay settings are in compliance with the specification requirements. I. The complete automatic transfer switch shall be subject to a dielectric strength test per NEMA Standard ICS 1-109.05. J. The control panel shall meet or exceed the voltage surge withstand capability in accordance with IEEE Standard 472-1974 (ANSI C37.90a) and the impulse withstand voltage test in accordance with NEMA Standard ICS 1-109. K. The automatic transfer switch shall be rated to withstand the rms symmetrical short circuit current available at the automatic transfer switch terminals, with the type of overcurrent protection, voltage and X/R ratio. L. The automatic transfer switch shall consist of a power transfer module and a control module, interconnected to provide complete automatic operation. The automatic transfer switch shall be mechanically held and electrically operated by a single -solenoid mechanism energized from the source to which the load is to be transferred. The switch shall be rated for continuous duty and inherently double throw. The switch shall be mechanically interlocked to ensure only one of two possible positions - normal or emergency. The automatic transfer switch shall be suitable for use with emergency sources such as engine generator source or another utility source. M. The control module shall be supplied with a protective cover and be mounted separately from the transfer switch for ease of maintenance. Sensing and control logic shall be solid state and mounted on plug-in printed circuit boards. Printed circuit boards shall be keyed to prevent incorrect installation. Interfacing relays shall be industrial control grade, plug-in type with dust covers and locking clips. The following shall also be provided for the control module: N. All phases of the normal shall be monitored line -to -line. Close differential voltage sensing shall be provide don all phases. The pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 72 percent to 100 percent of nominal and the dropout voltage shall be adjustable from 72 percent to 98 percent of the pickup value. The transfer to emergency will be initiated upon reduction of normal source to 85 percent of nominal voltage and retransfer to normal shall occur when normal source restores to 95 percent of nominal. 0. Neutral conductor terminal lugs as required for the system. P. All movable parts of the operating mechanism shall remain in positive mechanical contact with the main contacts during the transfer operation without the use of separate mechanical interlocks. PROJECT N0. 15-172-1017 26 32 13-7 SECTION 26 3213 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved ENGINE GENERATORS Automatic operation of the switch shall not require power from any source other than the line -to -line voltage of the source to which the switch is transferring. Q. Each automatic transfer switch shall include the following standard accessories: 1. (TDNE) Time delay on transfer from Normal to Emergency (adjustable 0 to 60 seconds). 2. (TDES) Time delay on Engine Starting (factory set at 3 seconds). 3. (TDEN) Time delay on transfer from Emergency to Normal adjustable 0 - 30 minutes). 4. (TDEC) Time delay on engine cool -off if not supplied with generator set. 5. Four position selector switch with white light. Permits four modes of switch operation -- TEST, AUTO, OFF, and ENGINE START. 6. Frequency/voltage relay for emergency source. 7. Disconnect plug on Wring harness to disconnect switch control logic. 8. Main shaft auxiliary contact rated ten (10) ampere at 240V (one closed on normal and one closed on emergency). 9. Green lamp to indicate switch in normal position and normal power is supplying loads. 10. Red lamp to indicate switch in emergency position and emergency power is supplying loads. 11.Inphase Monitor: Monitors normal and emergency sources and permits transfer when phase voltages are 15 degrees and two (2) cycles. If the source supplying the load fails or drops below 70 percent, the monitor will permit immediate transfer. 12. Load shedding contacts (2 NO and 2 NC) that operates from an adjustable 0.6 -60 seconds prior to transfer in either direction and resets .6 - 60 seconds after transfer. 2.04 ENGINE AND ENGINE ACCESSORY EQUIPMENT A. Provide engine with adequate horsepower to achieve specified power output at rated speed, accounting for alternator efficiency and parasitic loads. B. Engine Starting System: 1. System Type: Electric, with DC solenoid -activated starting motor(s). 2. Battery(s): a. Battery Type: Lead -acid. b. Battery Capacity: Size according to manufacturer's recommendations for achieving starting and load acceptance requirements under worst case ambient temperature; capable of providing cranking through two complete periods of cranking limiter time-outs without recharging. c. Provide battery rack, cables, and connectors suitable for the supplied battery(s); size battery cables according to manufacturer's recommendations for cable length to be installed. 3. Battery -Charging Alternator: Engine -driven, with integral solid-state voltage regulation. 4. Battery Charger: a. Provide dual rate battery charger with automatic float and equalize charging modes and minimum rating of 10 amps; suitable for maintaining the supplied battery(s) at full charge without manual intervention. b. Capable of returning supplied battery(s) from fully discharged to fully charged condition within 24 hours, as required by NFPA 110 for Level 1 applications while carrying normal loads. c. Recognized as complying with UL 1236. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 2632 13-8 SECTION 26 3213 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved ENGINE GENERATORS d. Furnished with integral overcurrent protection; current limited to protect charger during engine cranking; reverse polarity protection. e. Provide integral DC output ammeter and voltmeter with five percent accuracy. f. Provide alarm output contacts as necessary for alarm indications. g. Trickle type. 5. Battery Heater: Provide thermostatically controlled battery heater to improve starting under cold ambient conditions. 6. Include remote starting control circuit, with MANUAL -OFF -REMOTE selector switch on engine -generator control panel. C. Engine Speed Control System (Governor): 1. Single Engine Generator Sets (Not Operated in Parallel): Provide electronic isochronous governor for controlling engine speed/alternator frequency. 2. Electronic, mechanical adjustable to maintain engine speed within 0.5 percent, steady state, and 5 percent, no load to full load, with recovery to steady state within 2 seconds following sudden load changes. D. Engine Lubrication System: 1. System Type: Full pressure, with engine -driven, positive displacement lubrication oil pump, replaceable full -flow oil filter(s), and dip -stick for oil level indication. Provide oil cooler where recommended by manufacturer. E. Engine Cooling System: 1. System Type: Closed-loop, liquid -cooled, with unit -mounted radiator/fan and engine -driven coolant pump; suitable for providing adequate cooling while operating at full load under worst case ambient temperature. 2. Fan Guard: Provide suitable guard to protect personnel from accidental contact with fan. 3. Radiator: Radiator using glycol coolant, with blower type fan, sized to maintain safe engine temperature in ambient temperature of 110 degrees F (43 degrees C). Radiator Air Flow Restriction: 0.5 inches of water, maximum. F. Engine Air Intake and Exhaust System: 1. Air Intake Filtration: Provide engine -mounted, replaceable, dry element filter. 2. Engine Exhaust Connection: Provide suitable, approved flexible connector for coupling engine to exhaust system. 3. Exhaust Silencer: Provide critical grade or better exhaust silencer with sound attenuation not less than basis of design; select according to manufacturer's recommendations to meet sound performance requirements, where specified. G. Engine speed: 1800 rpm. H. Safety Devices: Engine shutdown on high water temperature, low oil pressure, overspeed, and engine overcrank. Limits as selected by manufacturer. 2.05 ALTERNATOR (GENERATOR) A. Alternator: 4 -pole, 1800 rpm (60 Hz output) revolving field, synchronous generator complying with NEMA MG 1; connected to engine with flexible coupling; voltage output configuration as indicated, with reconnectable leads for 3 phase alternators. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 263213-9 SECTION 26 3213 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC., All Rights Reserved ENGINE GENERATORS B. Exciter: 1. Exciter Type: Brushless; provide permanent magnet generator (PMG) excitation system; self-excited (shunt) systems are not permitted. 2. PMG Excitation Short -Circuit Current Support: Capable of sustaining 300 percent of rated output current for 10 seconds. 3. Voltage Regulation (with PMG excitation): Plus/minus 0.5 percent for any constant load from no load to full load. C. Temperature Rise: Comply with UL 2200. D. Insulation System: NEMA MG 1, Class H; suitable for alternator temperature rise. E. Enclosure: NEMA MG 1, drip -proof. F. Total Harmonic Distortion: Not greater than five percent. G. Voltage Regulation: Include generator -mounted volts per Hertz exciter -regulator to match engine and generator characteristics, with voltage regulation +/- one percent from no load to full load. Include manual controls to adjust voltage drop +/- 5 percent voltage level, and voltage gain. 2.06 GENERATOR SET CONTROL SYSTEM A. Provide microprocessor -based control system for automatic control, monitoring, and protection of generator set. Include sensors, wiring, and connections necessary for functions/indications specified. B. Control Panel: 1. Control Panel Mounting: Unit -mounted unless otherwise indicated; vibration isolated. 2. Generator Set Control Functions: a. Automatic Mode: Initiates generator set start/shutdown upon receiving corresponding signal from remote device (e.g. automatic transfer switch). b. Manual Mode: Initiates generator set start/shutdown upon direction from operator. c. Reset Mode: Clears all faults, allowing generator set restart after a shutdown, d. Emergency Stop: Immediately shuts down generator set (without time delay) and prevents automatic restarting until manually reset. e. Cycle Cranking: Programmable crank time, rest time, and number of cycles. f. Time Delay: Programmable for shutdown (engine cooldown) and start (engine warmup). g. Voltage Adjustment: Adjustable through range of plus/minus 5 percent. h. Push -to -test indicator lamps, one each for low oil pressure, high water temperature, overspeed, and overcrank. 3. Generator Set Status Indications: a. Voltage (Volts AC): Line -to -line, line -to -neutral for each phase. a) 3-1/2 inch dial, 2 percent accuracy, with phase selector switch. b. Current (Amps): For each phase. a) 3-1/2 inch dial, 2 percent accuracy, with phase selector switch. c. Frequency (Hz). a) 45-65 Hz range, 3-112 inch dial. d. Real power (W/kW). e. Reactive power (VAR/kVAR). PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 26 3213 -10 SECTION 26 3213 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved ENGINE GENERATORS f. Apparent power (VA/kVA). g. Power factor. h. Duty Level: Actual load as percentage of rated power. i. Engine speed (RPM). j. Battery voltage (Volts DC). k. Engine oil pressure. I. Engine coolant temperature. m. Engine run time. n. Generator powering load (position signal from transfer switch). o. Engine running time meter. p. Auxiliary Relay: 3PDT, operates when engine runs, with contact terminals prewired to terminal strip. 4. Generator Set Protection and Warning/Shutdown Indications: a. Comply with NFPA 110; configurable for NFPA 110 Level 1 or Level 2, or NFPA 99 systems including but not limited to the following protections/indications: a) Overcrank (shutdown). b) Low coolant temperature (warning). c) High coolant temperature (warning). d) High coolant temperature (shutdown). e) Low oil pressure (shutdown). f) Overspeed (shutdown). g) Low fuel level (warning). h) Low coolant level (warning/shutdown). i) Generator control not in automatic mode (warning). j) High battery voltage (warning). k) Low cranking voltage (warning). 1) Low battery voltage (warning). m) Battery charger failure (warning). b. In addition to NFPA 110 requirements, provide the following protections/indications: a) High AC voltage (shutdown). b) Low AC voltage (shutdown). c) High frequency (shutdown). d) Low frequency (shutdown). e) Overcurrent (shutdown). c. Provide contacts for local and remote common alarm. d. Provide lamp test function that illuminates all indicator lamps. 5. Other Control Panel Features: a. Event log. b. Remote monitoring capability via PC. C. Remote Annunciator: 1. Remote Annunciator Mounting: Wall -mounted; Provide flush -mounted annunciator for finished areas and surface -mounted annunciator for non -finished areas unless otherwise indicated. 2. Generator Set Status Indications: a. Generator powering load (via position signal from transfer switch). b. Communication functional. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 26 3213 -11 SECTION 26 3213 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved ENGINE GENERATORS 3. Generator Set Warning/Shutdown Indications: a. Comply with NFPA 110 for Level 1 systems including but not limited to the following indications: a) Overcrank (shutdown). b) Low coolant temperature (warning). c) High coolant temperature (warning). d) High coolant temperature (shutdown). e) Low oil pressure (shutdown). f) Overspeed (shutdown). g) Low fuel level (warning). h) Low coolant level (warning/shutdown). i) Generator control not in automatic mode (warning). j) High battery voltage (warning). k) Low cranking voltage (warning). 1) Low battery voltage (warning). IT) Battery charger failure (warning). b. Provide audible alarm with silence function. c. Provide lamp test function that illuminates all indicator lamps. 2.07 GENERATOR SET ENCLOSURE A. Enclosure Type: Sound attenuating, weather protective. B. Enclosure Material: Steel or aluminum. 1. All sheet metal shall be primed for corrosion protection and finish painted with the manufacturers standard color. C. Hardware Material: Stainless steel. D. Color: Manufacturer's standard. E. Access Doors: Lockable, with all locks keyed alike. F. Openings: Designed to prevent bird/rodent entry. 1. Housing shall provide ample airflow for generator set operation. the housing shall have hinged side -access doors and rear control door. G. External Drains: Extend oil and coolant drain lines to exterior of enclosure for maintenance service. H. Sound Attenuating Enclosures: Line enclosure with non -hydroscopic, self -extinguishing sound -attenuating material. I. Exhaust Silencers: Where exhaust silencers are mounted within enclosure in main engine compartment, insulate silencer to minimize heat dissipation as necessary for operation at rated load under worst case ambient temperature. 2.08 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 0140 00 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 26 3213 -12 SECTION 26 3213 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved ENGINE GENERATORS B. Perform production tests on generator sets at factory to verify operation and performance characteristics prior to shipment. Include certified test report with submittals. C. Generator Set production testing to include, at a minimum: 1. Operation at rated load and rated power factor. 2. Single step load pick-up. 3. Transient and steady state voltage and frequency performance. 4. Operation of safety shutdowns. D. Rating: Capacity as indicated, standby service, voltage as indicated, 60Hz at 1800 rpm. E. Skid -Mounted Fuel Tank: See drawings for size. Steel tank, with fill and vent. F. Batteries: Heavy duty, lead -acid storage batteries, 170 ampere -hours minimum capacity. Match battery voltage to starting system. Include necessary cables and clamps. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings. B. Verify that the ratings and configurations of generator sets and auxiliary equipment are consistent with the indicated requirements. C. Verify that rough -ins for field connections are in the proper locations. D. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive equipment. E. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. F. Verify that required utilities are available in proper location and ready for use. G. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1. B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Install generator sets and associated accessories in accordance with NECA/EGSA 404. D. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances and required maintenance access. E. Unless otherwise indicated, mount generator set on properly sized 6 inch high concrete pad constructed in accordance with Section 03 30 00. Provide suitable vibration isolators, where not factory installed. F. Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 26 05 29. G. Use manufacturer's recommended oil and coolant, suitable for the worst case ambient temperatures. H. Provide gas piping in accordance with Section 2210 05. PROJECT N0, 15-172-1017 2632 13-13 SECTION 26 32 13 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved ENGINE GENERATORS I. Provide engine exhaust piping in accordance with Section 23 5100, where not factory installed. 1. Include piping expansion joints, piping insulation, thimble, condensation trap/drain, rain cap, hangers/supports, etc. as indicated or as required. 2. Do not exceed manufacturer's maximum back pressure requirements. J. Install exhaust silencer in accordance with Section 23 5100, where not factory installed. K. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 05 26. L. Identify system wiring and components in accordance with Section 26 05 53. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 0140 00 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements. B. Notify Owner and Architect/Engineer at least two weeks prior to scheduled inspections and tests. C. Notify authorities having jurisdiction and comply with their requirements for scheduling inspections and tests and for observation by their personnel. D. Provide all equipment, tools, and supplies required to accomplish inspection and testing, including load bank and fuel. E. Preliminary inspection and testing to include, at a minimum: 1. Inspect each system component for damage and defects. 2. Verify tightness of mechanical and electrical connections are according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings. 3. Check for proper oil and coolant levels. F. Prepare and start system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. G. Perform acceptance test in accordance with NFPA 110. H. Inspection and testing to include, at a minimum: 1. Verify compliance with starting and load acceptance requirements. 2. Verify voltage and frequency; make required adjustments as necessary. 3. Verify phase sequence. 4. Verify control system operation, including safety shutdowns. 5. Verify operation of auxiliary equipment and accessories (e.g. battery charger, heaters, etc.). 6. Perform load tests in accordance with NFPA 110 (1.5 hour building load test followed by 2 hour full load test). a. During test, record the following at 20 minute intervals: a) Kilowatts. b) Amperes. c) Voltage. d) Coolant temperature. e) Room temperature. f) Frequency. g) Oil pressure. b. Test alarm and shutdown circuits by simulating conditions. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 26 3213 -14 SECTION 26 3213 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved ENGINE GENERATORS I. Provide field emissions testing where necessary for certification. J. Correct defective work, adjust for proper operation, and retest until entire system complies with contract documents. 3.04 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Provide the services of manufacturer's representative to prepare and start system. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to match original factory finish. 3.06 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. See Section 0178 00 - Closeout Submittals, for closeout submittals. B. See Section 0179 00 - Demonstration and Training, for additional requirements. C. Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of system to Owner, and correct deficiencies or make adjustments as directed. D. Training: Train Owner's personnel on operation, adjustment, and maintenance of system. 1. Use operation and maintenance manual as training reference, supplemented with additional training materials as required. 2. Provide minimum of two hours of training. 3. Instructor: Manufacturer's authorized representative. 4. Location: At project site. 5. Describe loads connected to standby system and restrictions for future load additions. 6. Simulate power outage by interrupting normal source, and demonstrate that system operates to provide standby power. E. After successful acceptance test and just prior to Substantial Completion, replace air, oil, and fuel filters. 3.07 PROTECTION A. Protect installed engine generator system from subsequent construction operations. 3.08 MAINTENANCE A. See Section 01 70 00 -Execution Requirements, for additional requirements relating to maintenance service. B. Provide to Owner at no extra cost, a separate maintenance contract for the service and maintenance of engine generator system for one year from date of Substantial Completion; Include a complete description of preventive maintenance, systematic examination, adjustment, inspection, and testing, with a detailed schedule. C. Conduct site visit at least once every three months to perform inspection, testing, and preventive maintenance. Submit report to Owner indicating maintenance performed along with evaluations and recommendations. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 2632 13.15 SECTION 26 3213 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved ENGINE GENERATORS D. Provide trouble call-back service upon notification by Owner: 1. Provide on-site response within 4 hours of notification. 2. Include allowance for call-back service during normal working hours at no extra cost to Owner. 3. Owner will pay for call-back service outside of normal working hours on an hourly basis, based on actual time spent at site and not including travel time; include hourly rate and definition of normal working hours in maintenance contract. E. Maintain an on-site log listing the date and time of each inspection and call-back visit, the condition of the system, nature of the trouble, correction performed, and parts replaced. END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 15-172.1017 26 3213 -16 SECTION 26 3213 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved ENGINE GENERATORS SECTION 26 36 00 TRANSFER SWITCHES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Transfer switches for low -voltage (600 V and less) applications and associated accessories: B. Manual Transfer Switch. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. B. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. C. Section 26 3213 - Engine Generators: Testing requirements. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010. B. NEMA 250 -Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2014. C. NEMA ICS 10 Part 1 - Industrial Control and Systems Part 1: Electromechanical AC Transfer Switch Equipment; 2005. D. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems; 2013. E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. F. UL 1008 - Transfer Switch Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide catalog sheets showing voltage, switch size, ratings and size of switching and overcurrent protective devices, operating logic, short circuit ratings, dimensions, and enclosure details. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product. D. Operation Data: Instructions for operating equipment under emergency conditions when engine generator is running. E. Maintenance Data: Routine preventative maintenance and lubrication schedule. List special tools, maintenance materials, and replacement parts. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with the following: PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 26 36 00 -1 SECTION 26 36 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved TRANSFER SWITCHES 1. NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code). B. Products: Listed, classified, and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) or testing firm acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose indicated. C. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. D. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience and with service facilities within 100 miles of Project. E. Supplier Qualifications: Authorized distributor of specified manufacturer with minimum three years documented experience. F. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL 1008, "Automatic Transfer Switches". 171A&ZJ091fillet0 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. ASCO Power Technologies, LP: www.asco.com, B. Eaton Corporation; Cutler -Hammer Products: www.eaton.com. C. Kohler: www.kohlerpowersystems.com. D. Cummins. E. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. 2.02 TRANSFER SWITCHES A. Provide complete power transfer system consisting of all required equipment, conduit, boxes, wiring, supports, accessories, system programming, etc. as necessary for a complete operating system that provides the functional intent indicated. B. Construction Type: Only "contactor type" (open contact) transfer switches are acceptable. Do not use "breaker type" (enclosed contact) transfer switches. C. Comply with NEMA ICS 10 Part 1, and list and label as complying with UL 1008 for the classification of the intended application (e.g. emergency, optional standby). D. Do not use double throw safety switches or other equipment not specifically designed for power transfer applications and listed as transfer switch equipment. E. Load Classification: Classified for total system load (any combination of motor, electric discharge lamp, resistive, and tungsten lamp loads with tungsten lamp loads not exceeding 30 percent of the continuous current rating) unless otherwise indicated or required. F. Switching Methods: 1, Open Transition: PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 263600-2 SECTION 26 36 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved TRANSFER SWITCHES a. Provide break -before -make transfer without a neutral position that is not connected to either source, and with interlocks to prevent simultaneous connection of the load to both sources. 2. Obtain control power for transfer operation from line side of source to which the load is to be transferred. G. Service Conditions: Provide transfer switches suitable for continuous operation at indicated ratings under the service conditions at the installed location. H. Enclosures: 1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: As indicated on the drawings. 2. Finish: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated. I. Short Circuit Current Rating: 1. Withstand and Closing Rating: Provide transfer switches, when protected by the supply side overcurrent protective devices to be installed, with listed withstand and closing rating not less than the available fault current at the installed location as indicated on the drawings. J. Non -Automatic Transfer Switches: 1. Description: Transfer switches with manually initiated transfer between sources; electrically operated and mechanically held. Electrical operator shall be a single solenoid mechanism, momentarily energized. 2. Control Functions: a. Manual source selection, mechanically interlocked to ensure only one of two possible positions (normal and emergency). b. Outputs: a) Auxiliary contacts; one set for each switch position. 3. Status Indications: a. Connected to alternate/emergency source. b. Connected to primary/normal source. c. Alternate/emergency source available. 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Indicating Lights: Mount in cover of enclosure to indicate NORMAL SOURCE AVAILABLE, ALTERNATE SOURCE AVAILABLE, and SWITCH POSITION. 1. Green lamp to indicate switch in normal position and normal power is supplying loads. 2. Red lamp to indicate switch in emergency position and emergency power is supplying loads. B. Test Switch: Mount in cover of enclosure to simulate failure of normal source. C. Two position selector switch with white light. Permits two modes of switch operation — TRANSFER TO NORMAL, TRANSFER TO GENERATOR. D. Disconnect plug on wiring harness to disconnect switch control logic. E. Main shaft auxiliary contact rated ten (10) ampere at 240V (one closed on normal and one closed on emergency). F. Transfer Switch Auxiliary Contacts: 1 normally open; l normally closed. G. Enclosure: ICS 10, Type 1, finished with manufacturer's standard gray enamel. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 263600-3 SECTION 26 36 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC., All Rights Reserved TRANSFER SWITCHES PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings. B. Verify that the ratings and configurations of transfer switches are consistent with the indicated requirements. C. Verify that rough -ins, for field connections are in the proper locations. D. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive transfer switches. E. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1. B. Install transfer switches in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances and required maintenance access. D. Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 26 05 29. E. Install transfer switches plumb and level. F. Unless otherwise indicated, mount floor -mounted transfer switches on property sized 3 inch high concrete pad constructed in accordance with Section 03 30 00. G. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 05 26. H. Identify transfer switches and associated system wiring in accordance with Section 26 05 53. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 0140 00 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements. B. Prepare and start system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Correct defective work, adjust for proper operation, and retest until entire system complies with contract documents. D. Provide the services of the manufacturer's technical representative to check out transfer switch connections and operation and place in service. E. Perform field inspection and testing in accordance with Section 0140 00. F. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA STD ATS, except Section 4. G. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS, Section 7.22.3. 3.04 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Provide the services of the manufacturer's technical representative to check out transfer switch connections and operations and place in service. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 263600-4 SECTION 26 36 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved TRANSFER SWITCHES 3.05 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Demonstrate operation of transfer switch in normal, and emergency modes. 3.06 MAINTENANCE A. See Section 0170 00 - Execution Requirements, for additional requirements relating to maintenance service. B. Provide service and maintenance of transfer switches for one year from Date of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 263600-5 SECTION 26 36 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved TRANSFER SWITCHES SECTION 3122 00 GRADING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Removal and storage of topsoil. B. Rough grading and recontouring the site for positive water drainage. C. Topsoil and finish grading for planting. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 3123 16.13 - Trenching: Trenching and backfilling for utilities. B. Section 32 92 19 - Seeding: Finish ground cover and additional topsoil requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Topsoil: Topsoil excavated on-site or as specified in Section 32 92 19. 1. Graded. 2. Free of roots, rocks larger than 1/2 inch, subsoil, debris, large weeds and foreign matter. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that survey bench mark and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated. B. Verify limits of work areas. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum. B. Stake and flag locations of known utilities. 1. Contact Joint Utility Locating Information for Excavators (JULIE 800-892-0123) before start of excavating work to ensure that existing utilities on the property are located and properly protected. C. Locate, identify, and protect from damage above- and below -grade utilities to remain. D. Protect site features to remain, including but not limited to bench marks, survey control points, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, and curbs, from damage by grading equipment and vehicular traffic. E. Protect plants, lawns, rock outcroppings, and other features to remain as a portion of final landscaping. 3.03 ROUGH GRADING A. Remove topsoil from areas to be further excavated, re -landscaped, or re -graded, without mixing with foreign materials. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 31 22 00 -1 SECTION 31 22 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved GRADING B. Do not remove topsoil when wet. C. Remove subsoil from areas to be further excavated, re -landscaped, or re -graded. D. Do not remove wet subsoil, unless it is subsequently processed to obtain optimum moisture content. E. When excavating through roots, perform work by hand and cut roots with sharp axe. F. Stability: Replace damaged or displaced subsoil to same requirements as for specified fill. 3.04 SOIL REMOVAL and STOCKPILING A. Stockpile topsoil to be re -used on site; remove remainder from site. B. Remove excavated subsoil from site. C. Stockpiles: Use areas designated on site; pile depth not to exceed 2 feet; protect from erosion. 3.05 FINISH GRADING A. Before Finish Grading: 1. Verify building and trench backfilling have been inspected. 2. Verify subgrade has been contoured and compacted. B. Remove debris, roots, branches, stones, in excess of 112 inch in size. Remove soil contaminated with petroleum products. C. In areas where vehicles or equipment have compacted soil, scarify surface to depth of 3 inches. D. Place topsoil in areas where sodding are indicated. E. Place topsoil where required to level finish grade. F. Place topsoil to the following compacted thicknesses: 1. Areas to be Sodded: 4 inches. G. Place topsoil during dry weather. H. Remove roots, weeds, rocks, and foreign material while spreading. I. Near plants spread topsoil manually to prevent damage. J. Fine grade topsoil to eliminate uneven areas and low spots. Maintain profiles and contour of subgrade. K. Lightly compact placed topsoil. 3.06 REPAIR AND RESTORATION A. Existing Facilities, Utilities, and Site Features to Remain: If damaged due to this work, repair or replace to original condition. B. Other Existing Vegetation to Remain: If damaged due to this work, replace with vegetation of equivalent species and size. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 312200-2 SECTION 3122 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC., All Rights Reserved GRADING 3.07 CLEANING A. Remove unused stockpiled topsoil and subsoil. Grade stockpile area to prevent standing water. B. Leave site clean and raked, ready to receive landscaping. END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 312200-3 SECTION 3122 00 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved GRADING SECTION 3123 16.13 TRENCHING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Trenching, backfilling and compacting for utilities outside the building to utility main connections. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 3122 00 - Grading: Site grading. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Finish Grade Elevations: To match existing conditions. B. Subgrade Elevations: 6 inches below finish grade elevations. 1.04 REFERENCES A. AASHTO T 180 - Standard Specification for Moisture -Density Relations of Soils Using a 4.54 kg (10 -Ib) Rammer and a 457 mm (18 in.) Drop; 2010, B. ASTM D698 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-Ibf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)); 2012. C. ASTM D1557 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-Ibf/ft3 (2,700 kN m/m3)); 2012. D. ASTM D2487 - Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System); 2011. E. SSRBC - Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, adopted by the Illinois Department of Transportation on January 1, 2002, including applicable current Supplemental Specifications and Special Provisions. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Compaction Density Test Reports. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. When necessary, store materials on site in advance of need. B. Easements for existing utilities, both public and private, and utilities within public rights-of-way are shown on the drawings according to available records. If existing utility lines are encountered which conflict in location with new construction, notify Architect/Engineer, 1.07 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Schedule, sequence and coordinate the work of this section, and prior and subsequent portions of the work, in accordance with the requirements of Section 0140 00 - Quality Requirements. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 3123 16.13 -1 SECTION 3123 16.13 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC., All Rights Reserved TRENCHING PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FILL MATERIALS A. General Fill: Subsoil excavated on-site. 1. Graded. 2. Free of lumps larger than 3 inches, rocks larger than 2 inches, and debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetable and other deleterious matter. B. Structural Fill: Subsoil excavated on-site. C. Granular Fill - Gravel - Fill Type CA -7: Pit run washed stone; free of shale, clay, friable material and debris. 1. Graded in accordance with ASTM D2487 Group Symbol GW. D. Granular Fill: Conforming to SSRBC Article 1004.04; CA -7 or CA -11, except crushed concrete or blast furnace slag is not permitted. E. Fine Granular Fill: Conforming to SSRBC Article 1003.04. F. Sand: Natural river or bank sand; washed; free of silt, clay, loam, friable or soluble materials, and organic matter. 1. Grade in accordance with ASTM D2487 Group Symbol SW. G. Topsoil: See Section 3122 00. 2.02 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 0140 00 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for testing and analysis of soil material. B. If tests indicate materials do not meet specified requirements, change material and retest. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that survey bench marks and intended elevations for the work are as indicated. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum locations. B. See Section 3122 00 for additional requirements. 3.03 TRENCHING A. Notify Architect/Engineer of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue affected Work in area until notified to resume work. B. Slope banks of excavations deeper than 4 feet to angle of repose or less until shored. C. Do not interfere with 45 degree bearing splay of foundations. D. Cut trenches wide enough to allow inspection of installed utilities. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 3123 16.13 - 2 SECTION 3123 16.13 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC., All Rights Reserved TRENCHING E. Hand trim excavations. Remove loose matter. F. Remove large stones and other hard matter that could damage piping or impede consistent backfilling or compaction. G. Remove excavated material that is unsuitable for re -use from site. H. Remove excess excavated material from site. I. Pump out accumulated water in excavated trenches. J. Obtain, erect, maintain and remove signs, covers, barricades, flagmen and other control devices necessary for the purpose of diverting, regulating, warning or guiding pedestrian and vehicular traffic at open excavations. 1. Placement and Maintenance of Traffic Control Devices: In accordance with applicable parts of SSRBC Article 107.14. 3.04 PREPARATION FOR UTILITY PLACEMENT A. Cut out soft areas of subgrade not capable of compaction in place. Backfill with general fill. B. Compact subgrade to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent fill material. C. Until ready to backfill, maintain excavations and prevent loose soil from falling into excavation. 3.05 BACKFILLING A. Backfill to contours and elevations indicated using unfrozen materials. B. Employ a placement method that does not disturb or damage other work. C. Systematically fill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not fill over porous, wet, frozen or spongy subgrade surfaces. D. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill materials to attain required compaction density. E. Granular Fill: Place and compact materials in equal continuous layers not exceeding 6 inches compacted depth. F. Soil Fill: Place and compact material in equal continuous layers not exceeding 8 inches compacted depth. G. Slope grade away from building minimum 2 inches in 10 ft, unless noted otherwise. Make gradual grade changes. Blend slope into level areas. H. Correct areas that are over -excavated. 1. Thrust bearing surfaces: Fill with concrete. 2. Other areas: Use general fill, flush to required elevation, compacted to minimum 97 percent of maximum dry density. I. Compaction Density Unless Otherwise Specified or Indicated: 1. Under paving, slabs -on -grade, and similar construction: 98 percent of maximum dry density. 2. At other locations: 95 percent of maximum dry density. J. Reshape and re -compact fills subjected to vehicular traffic. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 3123 16.13 - 3 SECTION 3123 16.13 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved TRENCHING 3.06 BEDDING AND FILL AT SPECIFIC LOCATIONS A. Use general fill unless otherwise specified or indicated. B. Utility Piping and Conduits: 1. Bedding: Use fine granular fill. 2. Cover with general fill for lawn or planted areas. 3. Cover with granular fill for paved areas. 4. Fill up to subgrade elevation. 5. Compact in maximum 8 inch lifts to 95 percent of maximum dry density under lawn or planted areas. 6. Compact in maximum 6 inch lifts to 98 percent of maximum dry density under paved areas. Bl {l}i to] 4M-1111 [d *1 A. Top Surface of General Backfilling: Plus or minus 1 inch from required elevations. B. Top Surface of Backfilling Under Paved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch from required elevations. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 0140 00 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field inspection and testing. Evaluate results in relation to compaction curve determined by testing uncompacted material in accordance with ASTM D698 ("standard Proctor"), ASTM D1557 ("modified Proctor"), or AASHTO T 180. C. If tests indicate work does not meet specified requirements, See Section 0140 00 for procedures. 3.09 CLEANING A. Leave unused materials in a neat, compact stockpile. B. Remove unused stockpiled materials, leave area in a clean and neat condition. Grade stockpile area to prevent standing surface water. C. Leave borrow areas in a clean and neat condition. Grade to prevent standing surface water. END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 3123 16.13 - 4 SECTION 31 2316.13 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved TRENCHING SECTION 32 9219 SEEDING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preparation of subsoil. B. Placing topsoil. C. Seeding, mulching and fertilizer. D. Maintenance. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 3122 00 - Grading: Topsoil material. B. Section 3122 00 - Grading: Preparation of subsoil and placement of topsoil in preparation for the work of this section. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Weeds: Include Dandelion, Jimsonweed, Quackgrass, Horsetail, Morning Glory, Rush Grass, Mustard, Lambsquarter, Chickweed, Cress, Crabgrass, Canadian Thistle, Nutgrass, Poison Oak, Blackberry, Tansy Ragwort, Bermuda Grass, Johnson Grass, Poison Ivy, Nut Sedge, Nimble Will, Bindweed, Bent Grass, Wild Garlic, Perennial Sorrel, and Brome Grass. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance instructions, cutting method and maximum grass height; types, application frequency, and recommended coverage of fertilizer . 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with regulatory agencies for fertilizer and herbicide composition. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SEED MIXTURE A. Seed Mixture: 1. Kentucky Blue Grass: 80 percent. 2. Perennial Rye: 20 percent. 2.02 SOIL MATERIALS A. Topsoil: Fertile, agricultural soil, typical for locality, capable of sustaining vigorous plant growth, taken from drained site; free of subsoil, clay or impurities, plants, weeds and roots; pH value of minimum 5.4 and maximum 7.0. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 3292 19 -1 SECTION 32 9219 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SEEDING 1411] A. Fertilizer: 18-24-6 analysis starter fertilizer; recommended for grass, with fifty percent of the elements derived from organic sources. B. Water: Clean, fresh and free of substances or matter that could inhibit vigorous growth of grass. C. Erosion Fabric: Jute matting, open weave. Installed at all areas of affected work after seeding. D. Herbicide: Super Trimec as manufactured by PBI?Grodon Corporation.. E. Stakes: Softwood lumber, chisel pointed. F. String: Inorganic fiber. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that prepared soil base is ready to receive the work of this Section. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare subgrade in accordance with Section 31 22 00. B. Place topsoil in accordance with Section 3122 00. 3.03 FERTILIZING A. Apply fertilizer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Apply after smooth raking of topsoil and prior to roller compaction. C. Do not apply fertilizer at same time or with same machine as will be used to apply seed. D. Mix thoroughly into upper 2 inches of topsoil. E. Lightly water to aid the dissipation of fertilizer. 3.04 SEEDING A. Apply seed at a rate of 5.5 lbs per 1000 sq ft evenly in two intersecting directions. Rake in lightly. B. Do not seed areas in excess of that which can be mulched on same day. C. Do not sow immediately following rain, when ground is too dry, or during windy periods. D. Immediately following seeding and compacting, install erosion fabric at all areas of affected work. Maintain clear of shrubs and trees. E. Apply water with a fine spray immediately after each area has been mulched. Saturate to 4 inches of soil. F. Following germination, immediately re -seed areas without germinated seeds that are larger than 4 by 4 inches. PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 3292 19-2 SECTION 32 9219 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC., All Rights Reserved SEEDING 3.05 PROTECTION A. Identify seeded areas with stakes and string around area periphery. Set string height to 24 inches. Space stakes at 120 inches. B. Cover seeded slopes where grade is 1 inches per foot or greater with erosion fabric. Roll fabric onto slopes without stretching or pulling. C. Lay fabric smoothly on surface, bury top end of each section in 6 inch deep excavated topsoil trench. Provide 12 inch overlap of adjacent rolls. Backfill trench and rake smooth, level with adjacent soil. D. Secure outside edges and overlaps at 36 inch intervals with stakes. E. Lightly dress slopes with topsoil to ensure close contact between fabric and soil. F. At sides of ditches, lay fabric laps in direction of water flow. Lap ends and edges minimum 6 inches. 3.06 MAINTENANCE A. Provide maintenance at no extra cost to Owner; Owner will pay for water. B. See Section 0170 00 - Execution Requirements, for additional requirements relating to maintenance service. C. Maintain seeded areas immediately after placement until grass is well established and exhibits a vigorous growing condition. D. Water to prevent grass and soil from drying out. E. Roll surface to remove minor depressions or irregularities. F. Control growth of weeds. Apply herbicides in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Remedy damage resulting from improper use of herbicides. G. Immediately reseed areas that show bare spots. H. Protect seeded areas with warning signs during maintenance period. END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 3292 19-3 SECTION 32 9219 Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SEEDING ATTACHMENT C LIST OF DRAWINGS ATTACHMENT C DATE LAST SHEET NOS. SHEET TITLES REVISED G100 Cover Sheet, General Notes, Symbols, & Drawing Index 11/11/2016 A101 Equipment Wall Details 11/11/2016 E010 Electrical Symbols List &Panel Schedules 11/11/2016 E100 Electrical Site Plan 11/11/2016 E300 Electrical Lower Level Power Plan 11/11/2016 E310 Electrical Main Level Power Plan 11/11/2016 E800 Electrical One -Line Riser Diagram & Details 11/11/2016 -I- SAM 0 ., S3avijoci 1 SW3ISAS'iVOR113313 - HOOM9 NVO 30 3'Jtll�lA 41 0 0.b i ems`?- YYppQppQ ��aiJ3� �$ � Y _ tlNtlgap�S a Y m W OUX) aM O<m mXmFIrOK `u § K g p,i YQ U)lo YYm�JQ O J ov b@wa O_O LL JC 04mO Omp WVYO WYO �`;�"_ OFOm OOm l �W0:10R."i oY mmQe'°'s�"6 jF Nu �oY a 5-1044W. O 5V Y�mfW F' °�sFsy O W W W W YE ¢fie11T, Il O a w DRAFTING MATERIALS LEGEND x j j ag ..' e , la- 1, 15, ill 51 fi rrr rr rr ......... r r r ... -¢` j � �€�e'�pesmi$�pan,.xaux�d m a ( § 5s m 6 aaq� �i o d pg y@ a¢ n Mal&g m§12 Q gg a 0? 5 44 F 6g5 @@¢gy �$$ yi x CC,pp @$ §§P �e� @ �& $§° a# 4$ 44§�4 ? 545 5? 3i� a4 4k a I ggg igy g §@ g m e§ �3y $ § �� $`�"-gyp-��`?@ a iate o.r.,rr�rr..rrr�r��r�r�33r�...r...r,,.r,,r��rr��r,�r,r�rrr�rr�r.rrrr,grr $ � d 1-46 V€y 8 �M5@5ggi §Neg g$3 iyytV¢ cad@yyyy pypy vpvg.� ¢¢9sjC°3kfC pg[$y$$r�Fr�Fj€j€ �Y�k�Y�``[2[,�y}y} �{�d�{ 3333y® EC YL SQ�rr�ySi� ggqp keE�E�"" Liggaatl� g5p{p{��5m5m,�@�k�""r y @q` a �e � @� � �4E�� p �kSMtlE 6Pp@' Z < aykg3gak"F., ,yqY�i {{6gGi <i��§$��S�Y£{Y,e{Q�'<s2�Bgta@EItlrABb£N��tl3Vb�a�tly8��I3�tl�Btldvld�886k��'�}tl��gl�GS�� < [gg p@, <p ♦i a <gg� gmp tlY i3i e��ii4g��YYY£5�'13YCBm6vdmmm6��d�m3dk6Btlmd8��6��rr G � �odw.'ltl��u tl..Lfie.r.r S30vuodi SW3ISAS W312LL33-13-NOONS NVO d0 30VIIIA � 2 � � 1 WR Q it® E6 Q E 6$ 9 yp! a s Qa fl[ Irk'I III I la a s g '� a@@QpG8 ¢fl kill l $ 4 §4 @ E ! 6@ 6 & �p 6gg og4 !,� 9 23 w p 9 3 i 4 �66i�3i zga' 4 r ' gi g gpp b p6°G_I w a EI e 34 0 3i pppppp qq�pppppp qqg{ g##flyyjjggqq pQ `9plpiQp9ppB¢ 1pap8C3Qp�pgEg p�p ¢gyp �-4h."-.—,� -a � E �4® 7 § A462A�A4686§!@�ES 19 15 � zb 0 z§ 5 � pp ( '31 p] g I ',... — — II I I ZIN LL w w ' �Q •. 441] � 3 •• � jam. a^ f 6 a • �_____� n W a- Eg gg¢Jig j I I I e I i I i F3 fk la -b cz W v•5 ZOa W I o z0� W 2 LI'n 1 I " O O J I e fl i� 6 NS E yyT. � eEp3Ep rQH jHr O 1 i I IIII i II II I `tea> l i I III 71 1 II � 6• 6 g I� tea, .awrewo . ° E p S30tla'Jdit SW3ISAS ItlORl10313 • N002i8 Htl0 d0 30V711ALu Y gi€ A II a. wg, i TT 1-1,�k� F€ F9 � ei Iii F F �-a 4 w F � t,_ ¢ g gpg51 9 o � Al 8 a �p 6 g tl sB e � i �€$f°ti, Fs Ix Far �I4as FIa�g?�g I � H RHi ass F I� a 6g s fF�F f s a p€'� mgorev Nc�S�®r-Lo{t=om®�•�� 4Itfk� b re w C azx a E93 5 is �sl e44 s he : 5Fui 2k� 5k kl4 &ilk g4 1. k' gP 8a hi alb IL @�v . t. .I., .. s s �''y i ♦ e e r�iEPe S30VHSd0 SWBiSAS 1V04110313 - MOONG NVO JO 3OV-n W °Ig�g g3 E lt3�g9 s°e gggg IN99 ,11h, �vr 111 �5$5�gGtp' pp4g��8gip�� C� A�Bd! O8y1 9@@a� yC l GGp�[ggig FGqp@ iI5�§5�jG T P 3 BF yt �4GFG111451 yGy g4g9�9pFp yGy pFp4@.4Fp@p®9® PG lIM11S 5@AA@ 1 9 9 1 1 9 1 1 9933 9 4139 x F; PRO S Q k y+ 0 E J� _ W `90 I=Y w O P l W W Q 6 Q r —G W by ppr U @ € 33 P J I SeE ro—_�e R `I 2 € pp/ p Lcj 1Y @ FS G � Y @ g $i ��@NNI _� W y @ i x i 14 ® S3aV210dn SW3ISAS ivowio3m • HOONS HV0 d0 30VIIIA c g € r � ", W pppp ®@®@ EE Y �E Ggtl� F i ilk, B z J ptA�9� z e� �E � y \ A r hYP'i #'4" 91 G30VUDdn SWBISAS 9V01il1O3'13 •NOONBNVO30 30Vllln W 5 2 ' e $ it W a SA eye 0 O 1 t g�g ¢C' k O it rE O y � K N \ J J f I -r C1 l i I r I . lit �_ II fes. mg a a fq� 6 "aplq MS p ye j �e pg1.11� p'�Afgg� C¢GMo� � I� � ! Gl��iQ�• �� Y d Q Q i a u, � � �' YQpB fix '�• j X 1 � Y / ��y � D WO O Qa ¢ ag w e yy55 F E R E av 6 4 6 e41 ��/ ape j 131 a ST" 9 03 ► 1 ATTACHMENT D SPECIAL PROJECT REQUIREMENTS 1. Contractor shall have five (5) years of experience which is comparable in type and scope to this project. 2. Work hours are 7:00 a.m. to 4:30 p.m. Monday through Friday. Any deviation is subject to the approval of the Village representative. 3. The project will be done on consecutive work days, excluding weekends and holidays observed by the Village, until completed, delays only to inclement weather. 4. Contractor is required to obtain all necessary permits from the Village of Oak Brook, and schedule required inspections through Development Services. 5. The Contractor shall supply to the Village, phone numbers where he/she can be reached after normal working hours. 6. The Contractor must submit all manufacturers' literature on all materials that will be used on this project, including M.S.D.S. (Material Safety Data Sheets) prior to any work beginning. 7. A storage location for supplies, ladders and scaffolding shall be mutually agreed upon between the Village and the contractor before any material is stored on site. The Contractor must deliver material with manufacturers labels intact and legible, store material on raised platforms and cover material with protective covering. 8. Before work is started, Contractor must deliver to the job site sufficient material to complete the project. 9. If a dumpster is required, the location of the dumpster placement shall be mutually agreed upon between the Village and the contractor. 10. All ladders and scaffolding shall be maintained in prior working order during the course of this project and shall be secured at the end of each workday. 11. Contractor must provide barricades to ensure that falling debris will not injure anyone, and to prevent public access to the work area at all times. Yellow "CAUTION" tape will be placed below the immediate work areas of laborers and scaffolds to warn the public of people working overhead. ATTACHMENT D 12. At all times, Contractor must keep the work and storage areas in a clean, orderly, and a picked up manner, to prevent debris from blowing. Clean adjoining streets and immediate vicinity at the end of each work day. Sidewalks, windowsills, roofs and other work areas will be broom swept to remove all debris. Daily material and debris not placed into dumpster will be removed from the site. 13. Upon completion of the project the work area shall be cleaned. All debris and remaining material and supplies shall be removed from the jobsite, including the dumpster within 72 hours of completion. 14. Upon completion the Contractor shall supply a one year warranty covering material and workmanship; contractor shall submit sample warranty with bid. PREVAILING WAGES Cook County Prevailing Wage for July 2015 (See explanation of column headings at bottom of wages) Trade Name RG TYP C Base FRMAN M -F>8 OSA OSH H/W Pensn Vac Trng ASBESTOS ABT -GEN ALL 39.400 39.950 1.5 1.5 2.0 13.98 10.72 0.000 0.500 ASBESTOS ABT -MEC BLD 36.340 38.840 1.5 1.5 2.0 11.47 10.96 0.000 0.720 BOILERMAKER BLD 47.070 51.300 2.0 2.0 2.0 6.970 18.13 0.000 0.400 BRICK MASON BLD 43.780 48.160 1.5 1.5 2.0 10.05 14.43 0.000 1.030 CARPENTER ALL 44.350 46.350 1.5 1.5 2.0 11.79 16.39 0.000 0.630 CEMENT MASON ALL 43.750 45.750 2.0 1.5 2.0 13.05 14.45 0.000 0.480 CERAMIC TILE FNSHER BLD 36.810 0.000 1.5 1.5 2.0 10.55 9.230 0.000 0.770 COMM. ELECT. BLD 40.000 42.800 1.5 1.5 2.0 8.670 12.57 1.100 0.750 ELECTRIC PWR EQMT OP ALL 46.100 51.100 1.5 1.5 2.0 10.76 14.87 0.000 0.460 ELECTRIC PWR GRNDMAN ALL 37.050 52.500 1.5 2.0 2.0 8.630 12.28 0.000 0.370 ELECTRIC PWR LINEMAN ALL 47.500 52.500 1.5 2.0 1.5 11.06 15.75 0.000 0.480 ELECTRICIAN ALL 45.000 48.000 1.5 1.5 2.0 13.83 15.27 0.000 1.000 ELEVATOR CONSTRUCTOR BLD 50.800 57.150 2.0 2.0 2.0 13.57 14.21 4.060 0.600 FENCE ERECTOR ALL 37.340 39.340 1.5 1.5 2.0 13.05 12.06 0.000 0.300 GLAZIER BLD 40.500 42.000 1.5 2.0 2.0 13.14 16.99 0.000 0.940 HT/FROST INSULATOR BLD 48.450 50.950 1.5 1.5 2.0 11.47 12.16 0.000 0.720 IRON WORKER ALL 44.200 46.200 2.0 2.0 2.0 13.65 21.14 0.000 0.350 APPENDIX 1 LABORER ALL 39.200 39.950 1.5 1.5 2.0 13.98 10.72 0.000 0.500 LATHER ALL 44.350 46.350 1.5 1.5 2.0 13.29 16.39 0.000 0.630 MACHINIST BLD 45.350 47.850 1.5 1.5 2.0 7.260 8.950 1.850 0.000 MARBLE FINISHERS ALL 32.400 34.320 1.5 1.5 2.0 10.05 13.75 0.000 0.620 MARBLE MASON BLD 43.030 47.330 1.5 1.5 2.0 10.05 14.10 0.000 0.780 MATERIAL TESTER I ALL 29.200 0.000 1.5 1.5 2.0 13.98 10.72 0.000 0.500 MATERIALS TESTER II ALL 34.200 0.000 1.5 1.5 2.0 13.98 10.72 0.000 0.500 MILLWRIGHT ALL 44.350 46.350 1.5 1.5 2.0 13.29 16.39 0.000 0.630 OPERATING ENGINEER BLD 1 48.100 52.100 2.0 2.0 2.0 17.55 12.65 1.900 1.250 OPERATING ENGINEER BLD 2 46.800 52.100 2.0 2.0 2.0 17.55 12.65 1.900 1.250 OPERATING ENGINEER BLD 3 44.250 52.100 2.0 2.0 2.0 17.55 12.65 1.900 1.250 OPERATING ENGINEER BLD 4 42.500 52.100 2.0 2.0 2.0 17.55 12.65 1.900 1.250 OPERATING ENGINEER BLD 5 51.850 52.100 2.0 2.0 2.0 17.55 12.65 1.900 1.250 OPERATING ENGINEER BLD 6 49.100 52.100 2.0 2.0 2.0 17.55 12.65 1.900 1.250 OPERATING ENGINEER BLD 7 51.100 52.100 2.0 2.0 2.0 17.55 12.65 1.900 1.250 OPERATING ENGINEER FLT 1 53.600 53.600 1.5 1.5 2.0 17.10 11.80 1.900 1.250 OPERATING ENGINEER FLT 2 52.100 53.600 1.5 1.5 2.0 17.10 11.05 1.900 1.250 OPERATING ENGINEER FLT 3 46.400 53.600 1.5 1.5 2.0 17.10 11.80 1.900 1.250 OPERATING ENGINEER FLT 4 38.550 53.600 1.5 1.5 2.0 17.10 11.80 1.900 1.250 OPERATING ENGINEER FLT 5 55.100 53.600 1.5 1.5 2.0 17.10 11.80 1.900 1.250 OPERATING ENGINEER FLT 6 35.000 35.000 1.5 1.5 2.0 16.60 11.05 1.900 1.250 OPERATING ENGINEER HWY 1 46.300 50.300 1.5 1.5 2.0 17.55 12.65 1.900 1.250 OPERATING ENGINEER HWY 2 45.750 50.300 1.5 1.5 2.0 17.55 12.65 1.900 1.250 OPERATING ENGINEER HWY 3 43.700 50.300 1.5 1.5 2.0 17.55 12.65 1.900 1.250 OPERATING ENGINEER HWY 4 42.300 50.300 1.5 1.5 2.0 17.55 12.65 1.900 1.250 OPERATING ENGINEER HWY 5 41.100 50.300 1.5 1.5 2.0 17.55 12.65 1.900 1,.250 OPERATING ENGINEER HWY 6 49.300 50.300 1.5 1.5 2.0 17.55 12.65 1.900 1.250 OPERATING ENGINEER HWY 7 47.300 50.300 1.5 1.5 2.0 17.55 12.65 1.900 1.250 APPENDIX 1 ORNAMNTL IRON WORKER ALL 45.000 47.500 2.0 2.0 2.0 13.55 17.94 0.000 0.650 PAINTER ALL 41.750 46.500 1.5 1.5 1.5 11.50 11.10 0.000 0.770 PAINTER SIGNS BLD 33.920 38.090 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.600 2.710 0.000 0.000 PILEDRIVER ALL 44.350 46.350 1.5 1.5 2.0 13.29 16.39 0.000 0.630 PIPEFITTER BLD 46.000 49.000 1.5 1.5 2.0 9.000 15.85 0.000 1.780 PLASTERER BLD 43.430 46.040 1.5 1.5 2.0 13.05 14.43 0.000 1.020 PLUMBER BLD 46.650 48.650 1.5 1.5 2.0 13.18 11.46 0.000 0.880 ROOFER BLD 41.000 44.000 1.5 1.5 2.0 8.280 10.54 0.000 0.530 SHEETMETAL WORKER BLD 42.230 45.610 1.5 1.5 2.0 10.53 20.68 0.000 0.720 SIGN HANGER BLD 31.310 33.810 1.5 1.5 2.0 4.850 3.280 0.000 0.000 SPRINKLER FITTER BLD 49.200 51.200 1.5 1.5 2.0 11.75 9.650 0.000 0.550 STEEL ERECTOR ALL 42.070 44.070 2.0 2.0 2.0 13.45 19.59 0.000 0.350 STONE MASON BLD 43.780 48.160 1.5 1.5 2.0 10.05 14.43 0.000 1.030 SURVEY WORKER -> NOT IN EFFECT ALL 37.000 37.750 1.5 1.5 2.0 12.97 9.930 0.000 0.500 TERRAZZO FINISHER BLD 38.040 0.000 1.5 1.5 2.0 10.55 11.22 0.000 0.720 TERRAZZO MASON BLD 41.880 44.880 1.5 1.5 2.0 10.55 12.51 0.000 0.940 TILE MASON BLD 43.840 47.840 1.5 1.5 2.0 10.55 11.40 0.000 0.990 TRAFFIC SAFETY WRKR HWY 32.750 34.350 1.5 1.5 2.0 6.550 6.450 0.000 0.500 TRUCK DRIVER E ALL 1 35.480 35.680 1.5 1.5 2.0 8.350 10.50 0.000 0.150 TRUCK DRIVER E ALL 2 34.100 34.500 1.5 1.5 2.0 8.150 8.500 0.000 0.150 TRUCK DRIVER E ALL 3 34.300 34.500 1.5 1.5 2.0 8.150 8.500 0.000 0.150 TRUCK DRIVER E ALL 4 34.500 34.500 1.5 1.5 2.0 8.150 8.500 0.000 0.150 TRUCK DRIVER W ALL 1 35.600 35.800 1.5 1.5 1.5 8.250 9.140 0.000 0.150 TRUCK DRIVER W ALL 2 32.700 33.100 1.5 1.5 2.0 6.500 4.350 0.000 0.000 TRUCK DRIVER W ALL 3 32.900 33.100 1.5 1.5 2.0 6.500 4.350 0.000 0.000 TRUCK DRIVER W ALL 4 33.100 33.100 1.5 1.5 2.0 6.500 4.350 0.000 0.000 TUCKPOINTER BLD 43.800 44.800 1.5 1.5 2.0 8.280 13.49 0.000 0.670 Legend: RG (Region) TYP (Trade Type - All, Highway, Building, Floating, Oil & Chip,Rivers) APPENDIX 1 O (class) Base (Base Wage Rate) FRMAN (Foreman Rate) M -F>8 (OT required for any hour greater than 8 worked each day, Mon through Fri. OSA (Overtime (OT) is required for every hour worked on Saturday) OSE (Overtime is required for every hour worked on Sunday and Holidays) H/W (Health & Welfare Insurance) Roush (Pension) Vac (Vacation) Trng (Training) Explanations COOK COUNTY The following list is considered as those days for which holiday rates of wages for work performed apply: New Years Day, Memorial Day, Fourth of July, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, Christmas Day and Veterans Day in some classifications/counties. Generally, any of these holidays which fall on a Sunday is celebrated on the following Monday. This then makes work performed on that Monday payable at the appropriate overtime rate for holiday pay. Common practice in a given local may alter certain days of celebration. If in doubt., please check with IDOL. TRUCK DRIVERS (WEST) - That part of the county West of Barrington Road. ASBESTOS - GENERAL - removal of asbestos material/mold and hazardous materials from any place in a building, including mechanical systems where those mechanical systems are to be removed. This includes the removal of asbestos materials/mold and hazardous materials from ductwork or pipes in a building when the building is to be demolished at the time or at some close future date. ASBESTOS - MECHANICAL - removal of asbestos material from mechanical systems, such as pipes, ducts, and boilers, where the mechanical systems are to remain. CERAMIC TILE FINISHER The grouting, cleaning, and polishing of all classes of tile, whether for interior or exterior purposes, all burned, glazed or unglazed products; all composition materials, granite tiles, warning detectable tiles, cement tiles, epoxy composite materials, pavers, glass, mosaics, fiberglass, and all substitute materials, for tile made in tile -like units; all mixtures in tile like form of cement, metals, and other materials that are for and intended for use as a finished floor surface, stair treads, promenade roofs, walks, walls, ceilings, swimming pools, and all other places where tile is to form a finished interior or exterior. The mixing of all setting mortars including but not limited to thin -set mortars, epoxies, wall mud, and any other sand and cement mixtures or adhesives when used in the preparation, installation, repair, or maintenance of tile and/or similar materials. The handling and unloading of all sand, cement, lime, tile, fixtures, equipment, adhesives, or any other materials to be used in the preparation, installation, repair, or maintenance of tile and/or similar materials. Ceramic Tile Finishers shall fill all joints and APPENDIX 1 voids regardless of method on all tile work, particularly and especially after installation of said tile work. Application of any and all protective coverings to all types of tile installations including, but not be limited to, all soap compounds, paper products, tapes, and all polyethylene coverings, plywood, masonite, cardboard, and any new type of products that may be used to protect tile installations, Blastrac equipment, and all floor scarifying equipment used in preparing floors to receive tile. The clean up and removal of all waste and materials. All demolition of existing tile floors and walls to be re -tiled. COMMUNICATIONS ELECTRICIAN Installation, operation, inspection, maintenance, repair and service of radio, television, recording, voice sound vision production and reproduction, telephone and telephone interconnect, facsimile, data apparatus, coaxial, fibre optic and wireless equipment, appliances and systems used for the transmission and reception of signals of any nature, business, domestic, commercial, education, entertainment, and residential purposes, including but not limited to, communication and telephone, electronic and sound equipment, fibre optic and data communication systems, and the performance of any task directly related to such installation or service whether at new or existing sites, such tasks to include the placing of wire and cable and electrical power conduit or other raceway work within the equipment room and pulling wire and/or cable through conduit and the installation of any incidental conduit, such that the employees covered hereby can complete any job in full. MARBLE FINISHER Loading and unloading trucks, distribution of all materials (all stone, sand, etc.), stocking of floors with material, performing all rigging for heavy work, the handling of all material that may be needed for the installation of such materials, building of scaffolding, polishing if needed, patching, waxing of material if damaged, pointing up, caulking, grouting and cleaning of marble, holding water on diamond or Carborundum blade or saw for setters cutting, use of tub saw or any other saw needed for preparation of material, drilling of holes for wires that anchor material set by setters, mixing up of molding plaster for installationof material, mixing up thin set for the installation of material, mixing up of sand to cement for the installation of material and such other work as may be required in helping a Marble Setter in the handling of all material in the erection or installation of interior marble, slate, travertine, art marble, serpentine, alberene stone, blue stone, granite and other stones (meaning as to stone any foreign or domestic materials as are specified and used in building interiors and exteriors and customarily known as stone in the trade), carrara, sanionyx, vitrolite and similar opaque glass and the laying of all marble tile, terrazzo tile, slate tile and precast tile, steps, risers treads, base, or any other materials that may be used as substitutes for any of the aforementioned materials and which are used on interior and exterior which are installed in a similar manner. MATERIAL TESTER I: Hand coring and drilling for testing of materials; field inspection of uncured concrete and asphalt. APPENDIX MATERIAL TESTER II: Field inspection of welds, structural steel, fireproofing, masonry, soil, facade, reinforcing steel, formwork, cured concrete, and concrete and asphalt batch plants; adjusting proportions of bituminous mixtures. OPERATING ENGINEER - BUILDING Class 1. Asphalt Plant; Asphalt Spreader; Autograde; Backhoes with Caisson Attachment; Batch Plant; Benoto (requires Two Engineers); Boiler and Throttle Valve; Caisson Rigs; Central Redi-Mix Plant; Combination Back Hoe Front End -loader Machine; Compressor and Throttle Valve; Concrete Breaker (Truck Mounted); Concrete Conveyor; Concrete Conveyor (Truck Mounted); Concrete Paver Over 27E cu. ft; Concrete Paver 27E cu. ft. and Under: Concrete Placer; Concrete Placing Boom; Concrete Pump (Truck Mounted); Concrete Tower; Cranes, All; Cranes, Hammerhead; Cranes, (GCI and similar Type); Creter Crane; Spider Crane; Crusher, Stone, etc.; Derricks, All; Derricks, Traveling; Formless Curb and Gutter Machine; Grader, Elevating; Grouting Machines; Heavy Duty Self -Propelled Transporter or Prime Mover; Highlift Shovels or Front Endloader 2-1/4 yd. and over; Hoists, Elevators, outside type rack and pinion and similar machines; Hoists, One, Two and Three Drum; Hoists, Two Tugger One Floor; Hydraulic Backhoes; Hydraulic Boom Trucks; Hydro Vac (and similar equipment); Locomotives, All; Motor Patrol; Lubrication Technician; Manipulators; Pile Drivers and Skid Rig; Post Hole Digger; Pre -Stress Machine; Pump Cretes Dual Ram; Pump Cretes: Squeeze Cretes-Screw Type Pumps; Gypsum Bulker and Pump; Raised and Blind Hole Drill; Roto Mill Grinder; Scoops - Tractor Drawn; Slip -Form Paver; Straddle Buggies; Operation of Tie Back Machine; Tournapull; Tractor with Boom and Side Boom; Trenching Machines. Class 2. Boilers; Broom, All Power Propelled; Bulldozers; Concrete Mixer (Two Bag and Over); Conveyor, Portable; Forklift Trucks; Highlift Shovels or Front Endloaders under 2-1/4 yd.; Hoists, Automatic; Hoists, Inside Elevators; Hoists, Sewer Dragging Machine; Hoists, Tugger Single Drum; Laser Screed; Rock Drill (Self -Propelled); Rock Drill (Truck Mounted); Rollers, All; Steam Generators; Tractors, All; Tractor Drawn Vibratory Roller; Winch Trucks with "A" Frame. Class 3. Air Compressor; Combination Small Equipment Operator; Generators; Heaters, Mechanical; Hoists, Inside Elevators (remodeling or renovation work); Hydraulic Power Units (Pile Driving, Extracting, and Drilling); Pumps, over 3" (1 to 3 not to exceed a total of 300 ft.); Low Boys; Pumps, Well Points; Welding Machines (2 through 5); Winches, 4 Small Electric Drill Winches. Class 4. Bobcats and/or other Skid Steer Loaders; Oilers; and Brick Forklift. Class S. Assistant Craft Foreman. Class 6. Gradall. Class 7. Mechanics; Welders. APPENDIX OPERATING ENGINEERS - HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION Class 1. Asphalt Plant; Asphalt Heater and Planer Combination; Asphalt Heater Scarfire; Asphalt Spreader; Autograder/GOMACO or other similar type machines: ABG Paver; Backhoes with Caisson Attachment; Ballast Regulator; Belt Loader; Caisson Rigs; Car Dumper; Central Redi-Mix Plant; Combination Backhoe Front Endloader Machine, (1 cu. yd. Backhoe Bucket or over or with attachments); Concrete Breaker (Truck Mounted); Concrete Conveyor; Concrete Paver over 27E cu. ft.; Concrete Placer; Concrete Tube Float; Cranes, all attachments; Cranes, Tower Cranes of all types: Creter Crane: Spider Crane; Crusher, Stone, etc.; Derricks, All; Derrick Boats; Derricks, Traveling; Dredges; Elevators, Outside type Rack & Pinion and Similar Machines; Formless Curb and Gutter Machine; Grader, Elevating; Grader, Motor Grader, Motor Patrol, Auto Patrol, Form Grader, Pull Grader, Subgrader; Guard Rail Post Driver Truck Mounted; Hoists, One, Two and Three Drum; Heavy Duty Self -Propelled Transporter or Prime Mover; Hydraulic Backhoes; Backhoes with shear attachments up to 40' of boom reach; Lubrication Technician; Manipulators; Mucking Machine; Pile Drivers and Skid Rig; Pre -Stress Machine; Pump Cretes Dual Ram; Rock Drill - Crawler or Skid Rig; Rock Drill - Truck Mounted; Rock/Track Tamper; Roto Mill Grinder; Slip -Form Paver; Snow Melters; Soil Test Drill Rig (Truck Mounted); Straddle Buggies; Hydraulic Telescoping Form (Tunnel); Operation of Tieback Machine; Tractor Drawn Belt Loader; Tractor Drawn Belt Loader (with attached pusher - two engineers); Tractor with Boom; Tractaire with Attachments; Traffic Barrier Transfer Machine; Trenching; Truck Mounted Concrete Pump with Boom; Raised or Blind Hole Drills (Tunnel Shaft); Underground Boring and/or Mining Machines 5 ft. in diameter and over tunnel, etc; Underground Boring and/or Mining Machines under 5 ft. in diameter; Wheel Excavator; Widener (APSCO). Class 2. Batch Plant; Bituminous Mixer; Boiler and Throttle Valve; Bulldozers; Car Loader Trailing Conveyors; Combination Backhoe Front Endloader Machine (Less than 1 cu. yd. Backhoe Bucket or over or with attachments); Compressor and Throttle Valve; Compressor, Common Receiver (3); Concrete Breaker or Hydro Hammer; Concrete Grinding Machine; Concrete Mixer or Paver 7S Series to and including 27 cu. ft.; Concrete Spreader; Concrete Curing Machine, Burlap Machine, Belting Machine and Sealing Machine; Concrete Wheel Saw; Conveyor Muck Cars (Haglund or Similar Type); Drills, All; Finishing Machine - Concrete; Highlift Shovels or Front Endloader; Hoist - Sewer Dragging Machine; Hydraulic Boom Trucks (All Attachments); Hydro -Blaster; Hydro Excavating (excluding hose work); Laser Screed; All Locomotives, Dinky; Off -Road Hauling Units (including articulating) Non Self -Loading Ejection Dump; Pump Cretes: Squeeze Cretes - Screw Type Pumps, Gypsum Bulker and Pump; Roller, Asphalt; Rotary Snow Plows; Rototiller, Seaman, etc., self-propelled; Self -Propelled Compactor; Spreader - Chip - Stone, etc.; Scraper - Single/Twin Engine/Push and Pull; Scraper - Prime Mover in Tandem (Regardless of Size); Tractors pulling attachments, Sheeps Foot, Disc, Compactor, etc.; Tug Boats. Class 3. Boilers; Brooms, All Power Propelled; Cement Supply Tender; Compressor, Common Receiver (2); Concrete Mixer (Two Bag and Over); Conveyor, Portable; Farm -Type Tractors Used for Mowing, Seeding, etc.; Forklift Trucks; Grouting Machine; Hoists, Automatic; Hoists, All Elevators; Hoists, Tugger Single Drum; Jeep Diggers; Low Boys; Pipe APPENDIX 1 Jacking Machines; Post -Hole Digger; Power Saw, Concrete Power Driven; Pug Mills; Rollers, other than Asphalt; Seed and Straw Blower; Steam Generators; Stump Machine; Winch Trucks with "A" Frame; Work Boats; Tamper -Form -Motor Driven. Class 4. Air Compressor; Combination - Small Equipment Operator; Directional Boring Machine; Generators; Heaters, Mechanical; Hydraulic Power Unit (Pile Driving, Extracting, or Drilling); Light Plants, All (1 through 5); Pumps, over 3" (1 to 3 not to exceed a total of 300 ft.); Pumps, Well Points; Vacuum Trucks (excluding hose work); Welding Machines (2 through 5); Winches, 4 Small Electric Drill Winches. Class 5. SkidSteer Loader (all); Brick Forklifts; Oilers. Class 6. Field Mechanics and Field Welders Class 7. Dowell Machine with Air Compressor; Gradall and machines of like nature. Ha3Ifty0 euejIAN0IkNII wz�3Kel4*rkId Class 1. Craft Foreman; Master Mechanic; Diver/Wet Tender; Engineer; Engineer (Hydraulic Dredge). Class 2. Crane/Backhoe Operator; Boat Operator with towing endorsement; Mechanic/Welder; Assistant Engineer (Hydraulic Dredge); Leverman (Hydraulic Dredge); Diver Tender. Class 3. Deck Equipment Operator, Machineryman, Maintenance of Crane (over 50 ton capacity) or Backhoe (115,000 lbs. or more); Tug/Launch Operator; Loader/Dozer and like equipment on Barge, Breakwater Wall, Slip/Dock, or Scow, Deck Machinery, etc. Class 4. Deck Equipment Operator, machine ryman/Fireman (4 Equipment Units or More); Off Road Trucks; Deck Hand, Tug Engineer, Crane Maintenance (50 Ton Capacity and Under) or Backhoe Weighing (115,000 pounds or less); Assistant Tug Operator. Class S. Friction or Lattice Boom Cranes. Class 6. ROV Pilot, ROV Tender SURVEY WORKER - Operated survey equipment including data collectors, G.P.S. and robotic instruments, as well as conventional levels and transits. TERRAZZO FINISHER The handling of sand, cement, marble chips, and all other materials that may be used by the Mosaic Terrazzo Mechanic, and the mixing, grinding, grouting, cleaning and sealing of all Marble, Mosaic, and Terrazzo work, floors, base, stairs, and wainscoting by hand or machine, and in addition, assisting and aiding Marble, Masonic, and Terrazzo Mechanics, TRAFFIC SAFETY APPENDIX Work associated with barricades, horses and drums used to reduce lane usage on highway work, the installation and removal of temporary lane markings, and the installation and removal of temporary road signs. TRUCK DRIVER - BUILDING, HEAVY AND HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION - EAST & WEST Class 1. Two or three Axle Trucks. A -frame Truck when used for transportation purposes; Air Compressors and Welding Machines, including those pulled by cars, pick-up trucks and tractors; Ambulances; Batch Gate Lockers; Batch Hopperman; Car and Truck Washers; Carry-alls; Fork Lifts and Hoisters; Helpers; Mechanics Helpers and Greasers; Oil Distributors 2 -man operation; Pavement Breakers; Pole Trailer, up to 40 feet; Power Mower Tractors; Self-propelled Chip Spreader; Skipman; Slurry Trucks, 2 -man operation; Slurry Truck Conveyor Operation, 2 or 3 man; Teamsters; Unskilled Dumpman; and Truck Drivers hauling warning lights, barricades, and portable toilets on the job site. Class 2. Four axle trucks; Dump Crets and Adgetors under 7 yards; Dumpsters, Track Trucks, Euclids, Hug Bottom Dump Turnapulls or Turnatrailers when pulling other than self -loading equipment or similar equipment under 16 cubic yards; Mixer Trucks under 7 yards; Ready -mix Plant Hopper Operator, and Winch Trucks, 2 Axles. Class 3. Five axle trucks; Dump Crets and Adgetors 7 yards and over; Dumpsters, Track Trucks, Euclids, Hug Bottom Dump Turnatrailers or turnapulls when pulling other than self -loading equipment or similar equipment over 16 cubic yards; Explosives and/or Fission Material Trucks; Mixer Trucks 7 yards or over; Mobile Cranes while in transit; Oil Distributors, 1 -man operation; Pole Trailer, over 40 feet; Pole and Expandable Trailers hauling material over 50 feet long; Slurry trucks, 1 -man operation; Winch trucks, 3 axles or more; Mechanic --Truck Welder and Truck Painter. Class 4. Six axle trucks; Dual-purpose vehicles, such as mounted crane trucks with hoist and accessories; Foreman; Master Mechanic; Self -loading equipment like P.B. and trucks with scoops on the front. Other Classifications of Work: For definitions of classifications not otherwise set out, the Department generally has on file such definitions which are available. If a task to be performed is not subject to one of the classifications of pay set out, the Department will upon being contacted state which neighboring county has such a classification and provide such rate, such rate being deemed to exist by reference in this document. If no neighboring county rate applies to the task, the Department shall undertake a special determination, such special determination being then deemed to have existed under this determination. If a project requires these, or any classification not listed, please contact IDOL at 217-782-1710 for wage rates or clarifications. LANDSCAPING Landscaping work falls under the existing classifications for laborer, operating engineer and truck driver. The work performed by APPENDIX 1 landscape plantsman and landscape laborer is covered by the existing classification of laborer. The work performed by landscape operators (regardless of equipment used or its size) is covered by the classifications of operating engineer. The work performed by landscape truck drivers (regardless of size of truck driven) is covered by the classifications of truck driver. MATERIAL TESTER & MATERIAL TESTER/INSPECTOR I AND II Notwithstanding the difference in the classification title, the classification entitled "Material Tester I" involves the same job duties as the classification entitled "Material Tester/Inspector I" Likewise, the classification entitled "Material Tester II" involves the same job duties as the classification entitled "Material Du Page County Prevailing Wage for July 2015 (See explanation of column headings at bottom of wages) Trade Name RG TYP C Base ERMAN M -F>8 OSA OSH H/W Pensn Vac Trng ASBESTOS ABT -GEN ALL 39.400 39.950 1.5 1.5 2.0 13.98 10.72 0.000 0.500 ASBESTOS ABT -MEC SLD 36.340 38.840 1.5 1.5 2.0 11.47 10.96 0.000 0.720 BOILERMAKER BLD 47.070 51.300 2.0 2.0 2.0 6.970 18.13 0.000 0.400 BRICK MASON BLD 43.780 48.160 1.5 1.5 2.0 10.05 14.43 0.000 1.030 CARPENTER ALL 44.350 46.350 1.5 1.5 2.0 13.29 16.39 0.000 0.630 CEMENT MASON ALL 43.750 45.750 2.0 1.5 2.0 13.05 14.45 0.000 0.480 CERAMIC TILE FNSHER BLD 36.810 0.000 1.5 1.5 2.0 10.55 9.230 0.000 0.770 COMMUNICATION TECH BLD 32.650 34.750 1.5 1.5 2.0 9.550 15.16 1.250 0.610 ELECTRIC PWR EQMT OP ALL 37.890 51.480 1.5 1.5 2.0 5.000 11.75 0.000 0.380 ELECTRIC PWR EQMT OP HWY 39.220 53.290 1.5 1.5 2.0 5.000 12.17 0.000 0.390 ELECTRIC PWR GRNDMAN ALL 29.300 51.480 1.5 1.5 2.0 5.000 9.090 0.000 0.290 ELECTRIC PWR GRNDMAN HWY 30.330 53.290 1.5 1.5 2.0 5.000 9.400 0.000 0.300 ELECTRIC PWR LINEMAN ALL 45.360 51.480 1.5 1.5 2.0 5.000 14.06 0.000 0.450 ELECTRIC PWR LINEMAN HWY 46.950 53.290 1.5 1.5 2.0 5.000 14.56 0.000 0.470 ELECTRIC PWR TRK DRV ALL 30.340 51.480 1.5 1.5 2.0 5.000 9.400 0.000 0.300 ELECTRIC PWR TRK DRV HWY 31.400 53.290 1.5 1.5 2.0 5.000 9.730 0.000 0.310 ELECTRICIAN BLD 38.160 41.980 1.5 1.5 2.0 9.550 18.29 4.68C 0.680 APPENDIX ELEVATOR CONSTRUCTOR BLD 50.800 57.150 2.0 2.0 2.0 13.57 14.21 4.060 0.600 FENCE ERECTOR NE ALL 37.340 39.340 1.5 1.5 2.0 13.05 12.06 0.000 0.300 FENCE ERECTOR W ALL 45.060 48.660 2.0 2.0 2.0 10.52 20.76 0.000 0.700 GLAZIER SLD 40.500 42.000 1.5 2.0 2.0 13.14 16.99 0.000 0.940 HT/FROST INSULATOR BLD 48.450 50.950 1.5 1.5 2.0 11.47 12.16 0.000 0.720 IRON WORKER E ALL 44.200 46.200 2.0 2.0 2.0 13.65 21.14 0.000 0.350 IRON WORKER W ALL 45.060 48.660 2.0 2.0 2.0 10.52 20.76 0.000 0.700 LABORER ALL 39.200 39.950 1.5 1.5 2.0 13.98 10.72 0.000 0.500 LATHER ALL 44.350 46.350 1.5 1.5 2.0 13.29 16.39 0.000 0.630 MACHINIST BLD 45.350 47.850 1.5 1.5 2.0 7.260 8.950 1.850 0.000 MARBLE FINISHERS ALL 31.400 32.970 1.5 1.5 2.0 9.850 13.10 0.000 0.600 MARBLE MASON BLD 43.030 47.330 1.5 1.5 2.0 10.05 14.10 0.000 0.780 MATERIAL TESTER I ALL 29.200 0.000 1.5 1.5 2.0 13.98 10.72 0.000 0.500 MATERIALS TESTER II ALL 34.200 0.000 1.5 1.5 2.0 13.98 10.72 0.000 0.500 MILLWRIGHT ALL 44.350 46.350 1.5 1.5 2.0 13.29 16.39 0.000 0.630 OPERATING ENGINEER BLD 1 48.100 52.100 2.0 2.0 2.0 17.55 12.65 1.900 1.250 OPERATING ENGINEER BLD 2 46.800 52.100 2.0 2.0 2.0 17.55 12.65 1.900 1.250 OPERATING ENGINEER BLD 3 44.250 52.100 2.0 2.0 2.0 17.55 12.65 1.900 1.250 OPERATING ENGINEER BLD 4 42.500 52.100 2.0 2.0 2.0 17.55 12.65 1.900 1.250 OPERATING ENGINEER BLD 5 51.850 52.100 2.0 2.0 2.0 17.55 12.65 1.900 1.250 OPERATING ENGINEER BLD 6 49.100 52.100 2.0 2.0 2.0 17.55 12.65 1.900 1.250 OPERATING ENGINEER BLD 7 51.100 52.100 2.0 2.0 2.0 17.55 12.65 1.900 1.250 OPERATING ENGINEER FLT 36.000 36.000 1.5 1.5 2.0 17.10 11.80 1.900 1.250 OPERATING ENGINEER HWY 1 46.300 50.300 1.5 1.5 2.0 17.55 12.65 1.900 1.250 OPERATING ENGINEER HWY 2 45.750 50.300 1.5 1.5 2.0 17.55 12.65 1.900 1.250 OPERATING ENGINEER HWY 3 43.700 50.300 1.5 1.5 2.0 17.55 12.65 1.900 1.250 OPERATING ENGINEER HWY 4 42.300 50.300 1.5 1.5 2.0 17.55 12.65 1.900 1.250 OPERATING ENGINEER HWY 5 41.100 50.300 1.5 1.5 2.0 17.55 12.65 1.900 1.250 APPENDIX 1 OPERATING ENGINEER HWY 6 49.300 50.300 1.5 1.5 2.0 17.55 12.65 1.900 1.250 OPERATING ENGINEER HWY 7 47.300 50.300 1.5 1.5 2.0 17.55 12.65 1.900 1.250 ORNAMNTL IRON WORKER E ALL 45.000 47.500 2.0 2.0 2.0 13.55 17.94 0.000 0.650 ORNAMNTL IRON WORKER W ALL 45.060 48.660 2.0 2.0 2.0 10.52 20.76 0.000 0.700 PAINTER ALL 41.730 43.730 1.5 1.5 1.5 10.30 8.200 0.000 1.350 PAINTER SIGNS BLD 33.920 38.090 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.600 2.710 0.000 0.000 PILEDRIVER ALL 44.350 46.350 1.5 1.5 2.0 13.29 16.39 0.000 0.630 PIPEFITTER BLD 46.000 49.000 1.5 1.5 2.0 9.000 15.85 0.000 1.780 PLASTERER BLD 41.250 43.760 1.5 1.5 2.0 9.700 13.08 0.000 0.980 PLUMBER BLD 46.650 48.650 1.5 1.5 2.0 13.18 11.46 0.000 0.880 ROOFER BLD 41.000 44.000 1.5 1.5 2.0 8.280 10.54 0.000 0.530 SHEETMETAL WORKER BLD 44.720 46.720 1.5 1.5 2.0 10.65 13.31 0.000 0.820 SPRINKLER FITTER BLD 49.200 51.200 1.5 1.5 2.0 11.75 9.650 0.000 0.550 STEEL ERECTOR E ALL 42.070 44.070 2.0 2.0 2.0 13.45 19.59 0.000 0.350 STEEL ERECTOR W ALL 45.060 48.660 2.0 2.0 2.0 10.52 20.76 0.000 0.700 STONE MASON SLD 43.780 48.160 1.5 1.5 2.0 10.05 14.43 0.000 1.030 SUR EY WGRKER -> NOT IN EFFECT ALL 37.000 37.750 1.5 1.5 2.0 12.97 9.930 0.000 0.500 TERRAZZO FINISHER BLD 38.040 0.000 1.5 1.5 2.0 10.55 11.22 0.000 0.720 TERRAZZO MASON BLD 41.880 44.880 1.5 1.5 2.0 10.55 12.51 0.000 0.940 TILE MASON BLD 42.840 46.840 1.5 1.5 2.0 10.55 10.42 0.000 0.920 TRAFFIC SAFETY WRKR HWY 32.750 34.350 1.5 1.5 2.0 6.550 6.450 0.000 0.500 TRUCK DRIVER ALL 1 35.920 36.120 1.5 1.5 2.0 8.280 8.760 0.000 0.150 TRUCK DRIVER ALL 2 32.700 33.100 1.5 1.5 2.0 6.500 4.350 0.000 0.150 TRUCK DRIVER ALL 3 32.900 33.100 1.5 1.5 2.0 6.500 4.350 0.000 0.150 TRUCK DRIVER ALL 4 33.100 33.100 1.5 1.5 2.0 6.500 4.350 0.000 0.150 TUCKPOINTER BLD 42.620 43.620 1.5 1.5 2.0 10.05 13.34 0.000 0.670 Legend: RG (Region) TYP (Trade Type - All,Highway,Building,Floating,0i1 & Chip,Rivers) C (Class) Base (Base Wage Rate) FRMAN (Foreman Rate) APPENDIX 1 M -F>8 (OT reauired for any hour greater than 8 worked each day, Mon through Fri. OSA (overtime (OT) is required for every hour worked on Saturday) OSH (Overtime is required for every hour worked on Sunday and Holidays) H/W (Health & Welfare Insurance) Pensn (Pension) Vac (Vacation) Trna (Training) Explanations DUPAGE COUNTY IRON WORKERS AND FENCE ERECTOR (WEST) - West of Route 53. The following list is considered as those days for which holiday rates of wages for work performed apply; New Years Day, Memorial Day, Fourth of July, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, Christmas Day and Veterans Day in some classifications/counties. Generally, any of these holidays which fall on a Sunday is celebrated on the following Monday. This then makes work performed on that Monday payable at the appropriate overtime rate for holiday pay. Common practice in a given local may alter certain days of celebration. If in doubt, please check with IDOL. EXPLANATION OF CLASSES ASBESTOS - GENERAL - removal of asbestos material/mold and hazardous materials from any place in a building, including mechanical systems where those mechanical systems are to be removed. This includes the removal of asbestos materials/mold and hazardous materials from ductwork or pipes in a building when the building is to be demolished at the time or at some close future date. ASBESTOS - MECHANICAL - removal of asbestos material from mechanical systems, such as pipes, ducts, and boilers, where the mechanical systems are to remain. TRAFFIC SAFETY - work associated with barricades, horses and drums used to reduce lane usage on highway work, the installation and removal of temporary lane markings, and the installation and removal of temporary road signs. CERAMIC TILE FINISHER The grouting, cleaning, and polishing of all classes of tile, whether for interior or exterior purposes, all burned, glazed or unglazed products; all composition materials, granite tiles, warning detectable tiles, cement tiles, epoxy composite materials, pavers, glass, mosaics, fiberglass, and all substitute materials, for tile made in tile -like units; all mixtures in tile like form of cement, metals, and other materials that are for and intended for use as a finished floor surface, stair treads, promenade roofs, walks, walls, ceilings, swimming pools, and all other places where tile is to form a finished interior or exterior. The mixing of all setting mortars including but not limited to thin -set mortars, epoxies, wall mud, and any other sand and cement mixtures or adhesives when used in the preparation, installation, repair, or maintenance of tile and/or similar materials. The handling and unloading of all sand, cement, lime, tile, APPENDIX I fixtures, equipment, adhesives, or any other materials to be used in the preparation, installation, repair, or maintenance of tile and/or similar materials. Ceramic Tile Finishers shall fill all joints and voids regardless of method on all tile work, particularly and especially after installation of said tile work. Application of any and all protective coverings to all types of tile installations including, but not be limited to, all soap compounds, paper products, tapes, and all polyethylene coverings, plywood, masonite, cardboard, and any new type of products that may be used to protect tile installations, Blastrac equipment, and all floor scarifying equipment used in preparing floors to receive tile. The clean up and removal of all waste and materials. All demolition of existing tile floors and walls to be re -tiled. COMMUNICATIONS TECHNICIAN Low voltage installation, maintenance and removal of telecommunication facilities (voice, sound, data and video) including telephone and data inside wire, interconnect, terminal equipment, central offices, PABX, fiber optic cable and equipment, micro waves, V -SAT, bypass, CATV, WAN (wide area networks), LAN (local area networks), and ISDN (integrated system digital network), pulling of wire in raceways, but not the installation of raceways. MARBLE FINISHER Loading and unloading trucks, distribution of all materials (all stone, sand, etc.), stocking of floors with material, performing all rigging for heavy work, the handling of all material that may be needed for the installation of such materials, building of scaffolding, polishing if needed, patching, waxing of material if damaged, pointing up, caulking, grouting and cleaning of marble, holding water on diamond or Carborundum blade or saw for setters cutting, use of tub saw or any other saw needed for preparation of material, drilling of holes for wires that anchor material set by setters, mixing up of molding plaster for installation of material, mixing up thin set for the installation of material, mixing up of sand to cement for the installation of material and such other work as may be required in helping a Marble Setter in the handling of all material in the erection or installation of interior marble, slate, travertine, art marble, serpentine, alberene stone, blue stone, granite and other stones (meaning as to stone any foreign or domestic materials as are specified and used in building interiors and exteriors and customarily known as stone in the trade), carrara, sanionyx, vitrolite and similar opaque glass and the laying of all marble tile, terrazzo tile, slate tile and precast tile, steps, risers treads, base, or any other materials that may be used as substitutes for any of the aforementioned materials and which are used on interior and exterior which are installed in a similar manner. MATERIAL TESTER I: Hand coring and drilling for testing of materials; field inspection of uncured concrete and asphalt. MATERIAL TESTER II: Field inspection of welds, structural steel, fireproofing, masonry, soil, facade, reinforcing steel, formwork, cured concrete, and concrete and asphalt batch plants; adjusting proportions of bituminous mixtures. APPENDIX i 'JUMORYY0IC,�I�IHAisIaY:�IiJl 1�711f Le] Class 1. Asphalt Plant; Asphalt Spreader; Autograde; Backhoes with Caisson Attachment; Batch Plant; Benoto (requires Two Engineers); Boiler and Throttle Valve; Caisson Rigs; Central Redi-Mix Plant; Combination Back Hoe Front End -loader Machine; Compressor and Throttle Valve; Concrete Breaker (Truck Mounted); Concrete Conveyor; Concrete Conveyor (Truck Mounted); Concrete Paver Over 27E cu. ft; Concrete Paver 27E cu. ft. and Under: Concrete Placer; Concrete Placing Boom; Concrete Pump (Truck Mounted); Concrete Tower; Cranes, All; Cranes, Hammerhead; Cranes, (GCI and similar Type); Creter Crane; Spider Crane; Crusher, Stone, etc.; Derricks, All; Derricks, Traveling; Formless Curb and Gutter Machine; Grader, Elevating; Grouting Machines; Heavy Duty Self -Propelled Transporter or Prime Mover; Highlift Shovels or Front Endloader 2-1/4 yd. and over; Hoists, Elevators, outside type rack and pinion and similar machines; Hoists, One, Two and Three Drum; Hoists, Two Tugger One Floor; Hydraulic Backhoes; Hydraulic Boom Trucks; Hydro Vac (and similar equipment); Locomotives, All; Motor Patrol; Lubrication Technician; Manipulators; Pile Drivers and Skid Rig; Post Hole Digger; Pre -Stress Machine; Pump Cretes Dual Ram; Pump Cretes: Squeeze Cretes-Screw Type Pumps; Gypsum Bulker and Pump; Raised and Blind Hole Drill; Roto Mill Grinder; Scoops - Tractor Drawn; Slip -Form Paver; Straddle Buggies; Operation of Tie Back Machine; Tournapull; Tractor with Boom and Side Boom; Trenching Machines. Class 2. Boilers; Broom, All Power Propelled; Bulldozers; Concrete Mixer (Two Bag and Over); Conveyor, Portable; Forklift Trucks; Highlift Shovels or Front Endloaders under 2-1/4 yd.; Hoists, Automatic; Hoists, Inside Elevators; Hoists, Sewer Dragging Machine; Hoists, Tugger Single Drum; Laser Screed; Rock Drill (Self -Propelled); Rock Drill (Truck Mounted); Rollers, All; Steam Generators; Tractors, All; Tractor Drawn Vibratory Roller; Winch Trucks with "A" Frame. Class 3. Air Compressor; Combination Small Equipment Operator; Generators; Heaters, Mechanical; Hoists, Inside Elevators (remodeling or renovation work); Hydraulic Power Units (Pile Driving, Extracting, and Drilling); Pumps, over 3" (1 to 3 not to exceed a total of 300 ft.); Low Boys; Pumps, Well Points; Welding Machines (2 through 5); Winches, 4 Small Electric Drill Winches, Class 4. Bobcats and/or other Skid Steer Loaders; oilers; and Brick Forklift. Class S. Assistant Craft Foreman Class 6. Gradall. Class 7. Mechanics; Welders. OPERATING ENGINEERS - HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION Class 1. Asphalt Plant; Asphalt Heater and Planer Combination; Asphalt Heater Scarfire; Asphalt Spreader; Autograder/GOMACO or other similar type machines: ABG Paver; Backhoes with Caisson Attachment; Ballast APPENDIX 1 Regulator; Belt Loader; Caisson Rigs; Car Dumper; Central Redi-Mix Plant; Combination Backhoe Front Endloader Machine, (1 cu. yd. Backhoe Bucket or over or with attachments); Concrete Breaker (Truck Mounted); Concrete Conveyor; Concrete Paver over 27E cu. ft.; Concrete Placer; Concrete Tube Float; Cranes, all attachments; Cranes, Tower Cranes of all types: Creter Crane: Spider Crane; Crusher, Stone, etc.; Derricks, All; Derrick Boats; Derricks, Traveling; Dredges; Elevators, Outside type Rack & Pinion and Similar Machines; Formless Curb and Gutter Machine; Grader, Elevating; Grader, Motor Grader, Motor Patrol, Auto Patrol, Form Grader, Pull Grader, Subgrader; Guard Rail Post Driver Truck Mounted; Hoists, One, Two and Three Drum; Heavy Duty Self -Propelled Transporter or Prime Mover; Hydraulic Backhoes; Backhoes with shear attachments up to 40' of boom reach; Lubrication Technician; Manipulators; Mucking Machine; Pile Drivers and Skid Rig; Pre -Stress Machine; Pump Cretes Dual Ram; Rock Drill - Crawler or Skid Rig; Rock Drill - Truck Mounted; Rock/Track Tamper; Roto Mill Grinder; Slip -Form Paver; Snow Melters; Soil Test Drill Rig (Truck Mounted); Straddle Buggies; Hydraulic Telescoping Form (Tunnel); Operation of Tieback Machine; Tractor Drawn Belt Loader; Tractor Drawn Belt Loader (with attached pusher - two engineers); Tractor with Boom; Tractaire with Attachments; Traffic Barrier Transfer Machine; Trenching; Truck Mounted Concrete Pump with Boom; Raised or Blind Hole Drills (Tunnel Shaft); Underground Boring and/or Mining Machines 5 ft. in diameter and over tunnel, etc; Underground Boring and/or Mining Machines under 5 ft. in diameter; Wheel Excavator; Widener (APSCO). Class 2. Batch Plant; Bituminous Mixer; Boiler and Throttle Valve; Bulldozers; Car Loader Trailing Conveyors; Combination Backhoe Front Endloader Machine (Less than 1 cu. yd. Backhoe Bucket or over or with attachments); Compressor and Throttle Valve; Compressor, Common Receiver (3); Concrete Breaker or Hydro Hammer; Concrete Grinding Machine; Concrete Mixer or Paver 7S Series to and including 27 cu. ft.; Concrete Spreader; Concrete Curing Machine, Burlap Machine, Belting Machine and Sealing Machine; Concrete Wheel Saw; Conveyor Muck Cars (Haglund or Similar Type); Drills, All; Finishing Machine - Concrete; Highlift Shovels or Front Endloader; Hoist - Sewer Dragging Machine; Hydraulic Boom Trucks (All Attachments); Hydro -Blaster; Hydro Excavating (excluding hose work); Laser Screed; All Locomotives, Dinky; Off -Road Hauling Units (including articulating) Non Self -Loading Ejection Dump; Pump Cretes: Squeeze Cretes - Screw Type Pumps, Gypsum Bulker and Pump; Roller, Asphalt; Rotary Snow Plows; Rototiller, Seaman, etc., self-propelled; Self -Propelled Compactor; Spreader - Chip - Stone, etc.; Scraper - Single/Twin Engine/Push and Pull; Scraper - Prime Mover in Tandem (Regardless of Size); Tractors pulling attachments, Sheeps Foot, Disc, Compactor, etc.; Tug Boats. Class 3. Boilers; Brooms, All Power Propelled; Cement Supply Tender; Compressor, Common Receiver (2); Concrete Mixer (Two Bag and Over); Conveyor, Portable; Farm -Type Tractors Used for Mowing, Seeding, etc.; Forklift Trucks; Grouting Machine; Hoists, Automatic; Hoists, All Elevators; Hoists, Tugger Single Drum; Jeep Diggers; Low Boys; Pipe Jacking Machines; Post -Hole Digger; Power Saw, Concrete Power Driven; Pug Mills; Rollers, other than Asphalt; Seed and Straw Blower; Steam Generators; Stump Machine; Winch Trucks with "A" Frame; Work Boats; Tamper -Form -Motor Driven. Class 4. Air Compressor; Combination - Small Equipment Operator; Directional Boring Machine; Generators; Heaters, Mechanical; Hydraulic Power Unit (Pile Driving, Extracting, or Drilling); Light Plants, All (1 through 5); Pumps, over 3" (1 to 3 not to exceed a total of 300 ft.); Pumps, Well Points; Vacuum Trucks (excluding hose work); Welding Machines (2 through 5); Winches, 4 Small Electric Drill Winches. Class S. SkidSteer Loader (all); Brick Forklifts; Oilers. Class 6. Field Mechanics and Field Welders Class 7. Dowell Machine with Air Compressor; Gradall and machines of like nature. OPERATING ENGINEER - FLOATING Diver. Diver Wet Tender, Diver Tender, ROV Pilot, ROV Tender SURVEY WORKER - Operated survey equipment including data collectors, G.P.S. and robotic instruments, as well as conventional levels and transits. TRUCK DRIVER - BUILDING, HEAVY AND HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION Class 1. Two or three Axle Trucks. A -frame Truck when used for transportation purposes; Air Compressors and Welding Machines, including those pulled by cars, pick-up trucks and tractors; Ambulances; Batch Gate Lockers; Batch Hopperman; Car and Truck Washers; Carry-alls; Fork Lifts and Hoisters; Helpers; Mechanics Helpers and Greasers; Oil Distributors 2 -man operation; Pavement Breakers; Pole Trailer, up to 40 feet; Power Mower Tractors; Self-propelled Chip Spreader; Skipman; Slurry Trucks, 2 -man. operation; Slurry Truck Conveyor Operation, 2 or 3 man; Teamsters; Unskilled Dumpman; and Truck Drivers hauling warning lights, barricades, and portable toilets on the job site. Class 2. Four axle trucks; Dump Crets and Adgetors under 7 yards; Dumpsters, Track Trucks, Euclids, Hug Bottom Dump Turnapulls or Turnatrailers when pulling other than self -loading equipment or similar equipment under 16 cubic yards; Mixer Trucks under 7 yeards; Ready -mix Plant Hopper Operator, and Winch Trucks, 2 Axles. Class 3. Five axle trucks; Dump Crets and Adgetors 7 yards and over; Dumpsters, Track Trucks, Euclids, Hug Bottom Dump Turnatrailers or turnapulls when pulling other than self -loading equipment or similar equipment over 16 cubic yards; Explosives and/or Fission Material Trucks; Mixer Trucks 7 yards or over; Mobile Cranes while in transit; Oil Distributors, 1 -man operation; Pole Trailer, over 40 feet; Pole and Expandable Trailers hauling material over 50 feet long; Slurry trucks, 1 -man operation; Winch trucks, 3 axles or more; Mechanic --Truck Welder and Truck Painter. Class 4. Six axle trucks; Dual-purpose vehicles, such as mounted crane trucks with hoist and accessories; Foreman; Master Mechanic; Self -loading equipment like P.B. and trucks with scoops on the front. APPENDIX TERRAZZO FINISHER The handling of sand, cement, marble chips, and all other materials that may be used by the Mosaic Terrazzo Mechanic, and the mixing, grinding, grouting, cleaning and sealing of all Marble, Mosaic, and Terrazzo work, floors, base, stairs, and wainscoting by hand or machine, and in addition, assisting and aiding Marble, Masonic, and Terrazzo Mechanics. other Classifications of Work: For definitions of classifications not otherwise set out, the Department generally has on file such definitions which are available. If a task to be performed is not subject to one of the classifications of pay set out, the Department will upon being contacted state which neighboring county has such a classification and provide such rate, such rate being deemed to exist by reference in this document. If no neighboring county rate applies to the task, the Department shall undertake a special determination, such special determination being then deemed to have existed under this determination. If a project requires these, or any classification not listed, please contact IDOL at 217-762-1710 for wage rates or clarifications. LANDSCAPING Landscaping work falls under the existing classifications for laborer, operating engineer and truck driver. The work performed by landscape plantsman and landscape laborer is covered by the existing classification of laborer. The work performed by landscape operators (regardless of equipment used or its size) is covered by the classifications of operating engineer. The work performed by landscape truck drivers (regardless of size of truck driven) is covered by the classifications of truck driver. MATERIAL TESTER & MATERIAL TESTER/ INSPECTOR I AND II Notwithstanding the difference in the classification title, the classification entitled "Material Tester I" involves the same job duties as the classification entitled "Material Tester/ Inspector I". Likewise, the classification entitled "Material Tester II" involves the same job duties as the classification entitled "Material STATE OF ILLINOIS ) ) COUNTY OF SS �p ) contractor's executing officer), being first duly sworn on oath, deposes d states that all statements herein made are made on behalf of Contractor, that this deponent is authorized to make them, and that the statements contained herein are true and correct. Contractor deposes, states, and certifies that Contractor is not barred from contracting with a unit of state or local government as a result of (i) a violation of either Section 33E-3 or Section 33E4 of Article 33E of the Criminal Code of 1961, 720 ILCS 5/33E-1 et seg.; or (ii) a violation of the USA Patriot Act of 2001, 107 Public Law 56 (October 26, 2001) (the "Patriot Act") or other statutes, orders, rules, and regulations of the United States government and its various executive departments, agencies and offices related to the subject matter of the Patriot Act, including, but not limited to, Executive Order 13224 effective September 24, 2001. AIRPORTDATED: 020 -7 ELECTRIC ,• ANy Subscribed and Sworn to before me on My Commission expires: (SEAL) OFFICIAL SEAL DANA NJtNGARAS ( NOTARY PUSLIC -STATE Of ILLINOIS MY COMMISSION EXPIRES 0610412017 Rt 201' BOND ISSUED IN TRIPLICATE u t A312 TM ® 2010 SURETY Conforms with The American Institute of Architects ALA Document 312 Performance Bond 601116930 CONTRACTOR: (Name, legal status and address) Airport Electric Co. 6342 S. Central Avenue Chicago, IL 60638 OWNER: (Name, legal status and address) Village of Oak Brook 1200 Oak Brook Road Oak Brook, IL 60523 CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Date: Ammmr. $426,678.00 Description: (Name and location) Village of Oak Brook - Electrical Systems Upgrade BOND Date: February 10, 2017 (Not earlier than Construction Contract Dare) Amount: $426,678.00 Modifications to this Bond: amNone CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL Company: (Co Airport Electric Co. SURETY: (Name, legal status and principal place of business) The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company 62 Maple Avenue Keene, NH 03431 Mailing Address for Notices The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company Attention: Surety Claims Department 1001 4th Avenue, Suite 1700 Seattle, WA 98154 E See Section 16 'V", (Couporate$eal) Casualty Insurance Company (Any additional signatures appear on the last page of this Perlin mance Bond) (FOR INFORMATION ONLY — Nome, address and telephone) AGENT or BROKER: OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE: Bonding Services Corp. (Architect, Engineer or odrerpam.) 1320 Tower Road Schaumburg, IL 60173 847-301-4255 Page 1 of 4 This document has important legal consequences. Consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to its completion or modification. Any singular reference to Contractor, Surety, Owner or other party shall be considered Plural where applicable. § 1 The Contractor and Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves_ their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns to the Owner for the performance of the Construction Contract, which is incorporated herein by reference. § 2 If the Contractor performs the Construction Contract, the Surety and the Contractor shall have no obligation under this Bond, except when applicable to participate in a conference as provided in Section 3. § 3 If there is no Owner Default under the Construction Contract, the Surety's obligation under this Bond shall arise after .1 the Owner first provides notice to the Contractor and the Surety that the Owner is considering declaring a Contractor Default. Such notice shall indicate whether the Owner is requesting a conference annong the Owner, Contractor and Surety to discuss the Contractor's performance. If the Owner does not request a conference, the Surety may, within five (5) business days after receipt of the Owner's notice, request such a conference. If the Surety timely requests a conference, the Owner shall attend. Unless the Owner agrees otherwise, any conference requested under this Section 3.1 shall be held within ten (10) business days of the Surety's receipt of the Owner's notice. If the Owner, the Contractor and the Surety agree, the Contractor shall be allowed a reasonable time to perform the Construction Contract, but such an agreement shall not waive the Owner's right, if any, subsequently to declare a Contractor Default; .2 the Owner declares a Contractor Default, terminates the Construction Contract and notifies the Surety; and .3 the Owner has agreed to pay the Balance of the Contract Price in accordance with the terms of the Construction Contract to the Surety or to a contractor selected to perform the Construction Contract. § 4 Failure on the part of the Owner to comply with the notice requirement in Section 3.1 shall not constitute a failure to comply with a condition precedent to the Surety's obligations, or release the Surety from its obligations, except to the extent the Surety demonstrates actual prejudice. § 5 When the Owner has satisfied the conditions of Section 3, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety's expense take one of the following actions: § 5.1 Arrange for the Contractor, with the consent of the Owner, to perform and complete the Constmetion Contract; § 5.2 Undertake to perform and complete the Construction Contract itself, through its agents or independent contractors; § 5.3 Obtain bids or negotiated proposals from qualified contractors acceptable to the Owner for a contract for performance and completion of the Construction Contract, arrange for a contract to be prepared for execution by the Owner and a court actor selected with the Owner's concurrence, to be secured with performance and payment bonds executed by a qualified surety equivalent to the bonds issued on the Construction Contract, and pav to the Owner the amount of damages as described in Section 7 in excess of the Balance of the Contract Price incurred by the Owner as a result of the Contractor Default; or § 5.4 Waive its right to perform and complete, arrange for completion, or obtain a new contractor and with reasonable promptness under the circumstances: .1 After investigation, determine the amount for which it may be liable to the Owner and, as soon as practicable after the amount is determined, make payment to the Owner; or .2 Deny liabilih' in whole or in part and notify the Owner, citing the reasons for denial. § 5 If the Surety does not proceed as provided in Section 5 with reasonable promptness, the Suretyshall be deemed to be in default on this Bond seven days after receipt of an additional written notice from the Owner to the Surety demanding that the Surety perform its obligations under this Bond, and the Owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to the Owner. If the Surety proceeds as provided in Section 5.4, and the Owner refuses the payment or the Surety has denied liability, in whole or in part, without further notice the Owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to the Owner. Page 2 of 4 § 7 if the Surety elects to act under Section 5. 1; 5.2 or 5.3, then the responsibilities of the Surety to the Owner shall not be greater than those of the Contractor under the Construction Contract, and the responsibilities of the Owner to the Surety shall not be greater than those of the Owner under the Construction Contract. Subject to the commitment by the Owner to pay the Balance of the Contract Price, the Surety is obligated, without duplication, for .1 the responsibilities of the Contractor for correction of defective work and completion of the Construction Contract; .2 additional legal, design professional and delay costs resulting from the Contractors Default, and resulting from the actions or failure to act of the Surety under Section 5; and .3 liquidated damages, or if no liquidated damages me specified in the Construction Contract, actual damages caused by delayed performance or non-performance of the Contractor. § 8 If the Surety elects to act tinder Section 5.1, 53 or 5.4, the Surety's liability is limited to the amount of this Bond_ § 9 The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner or others for obligations of the Conh'actor that are unrelated to the Construcdon Contract. and the Balance of the Contract Price shall not be reduced or set off on account of any such unrelated obligations. No right of action shall accrue on this Bond to any person or entity other than the Owner or its heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns. § 10 The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to the Construction Contract or to related subcontracts, purchase orders and other obligations. § 11 Any proceeding, legal or equitable, under this Bond may be instituted in any court of competent jurisdiction in the location in which the work or part of the work is located and shall be instituted within two years after a declaration of Contractor Default or within two years after the Contractor ceased working or within two years after the Surety refuses or fails to perform its obligations under this Bond, whichever occurs first. If the provisions of this Paragraph are void or prohibited by law, the minimum period of limitation available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit shall be applicable. § 12 Notice to the Surety, the Owner or the Contractor shall be mailed or delivered to the address shown on the page on which their signature appears. § 13 When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location where the construction was to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement shall be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be deemed incorporated herein. When so furnished, the intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond. § 14 Definitions § 14.1 Balance of the Contract Prise. The total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor under the Construction Contract after all proper adjustments have been made, including allowance to the Contractor of any amounts received or to be received by the Owner in settlement of insurance or other claims for darnages to which the Contractor is entitled, reduced by all valid and proper payments made to or on behalf of the Contractor under the Construction Contract. § 14.2 Construction Contract. The agreement between the Owner and Contractor identified on the weer page, including all Contract Documents and changes made to the agreement and the Contract Documents. § 14.3 Contractor Default. Failure of the Contractor. which has not been remedied or waived, to perform or otherwise to comply with a material tent of the Construction Contract § 14.4 Owner Default. Failure of the Owner, which has not been remedied or waived, to pay the Contractor as required under the Construction Contract or to perform and complete or comply with the other material terms of the Construction Contract. § 14.5 Contract Documents. All the documents that comprise the agreement between the Owner and Contractor. § 15 If this Bond is issued for an agreement benveen a Contractor and subcontractor, the tent Contractor in this Bond shall be deemed to be Subcontractor and the term Owner shall be deemed to be Contractor. Page 3 of 4 § 16 Modifications to this bond are as follows: (Space is provided helosvfor additional signatures of added parties, other than those appetuing on the cover page.) CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY Company: (Corporate Seal) Company: Signature: Signature: Name and Title: Name and Tidy. Address Address Page 4 of 4 (Corporate Seal) 0 BOND ISSUED IN TRIPLICATE Liberty Document A312 TM -2010 suRETY Payment Bond Conforms with The American Institute of Architects AIA Document 312 CONTRACTOR: (Name, legal status and address) Airport Electric Co. 6342 S. Central Avenue Chicago, IL 60638 OWNER: (Name, legal status and address) Village of Oak Brook 1200 Oak Brook Road Oak Brook, IL 60523 CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Date: Amount: $426,678.00 Description: (Name and location) Village of Oak Brook - Electrical Systems Upgrade BOND Date: February 10, 2017 (Not earlier than Construction Contract Date) Amount: $426,678.00 (Name, legal status and principal place ofbusiness) The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company 62 Maple Avenue Keene, NH 03431 Mailing Address for Notices The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company Attention: Surety Claims Department 1001 4th Avenue, Suite 1700 Seattle, WA 98154 Modifications to this Bond: ® None - [] See Section 18 CONTRACTOR AS PRINSIPAL Company: (Corporate Airport Electric Co. —t SURETY Company: (Corporate Seal) The OhiQ Casualty Insurance Company .r �gnature: T/ �''�,; /Irf J`AMetteAlbach Attomey-in-Fact (Any additional signatures appear on ,(he fast page of this Pa`dment Bond.) (FOR INFORMATION ONLY — Name, address and telephone) AGENT or BROKER: Bonding Services Corp. 1320 Tower Road Schaumburg, IL 60173 847-301-4255 OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE: (Architect, Engineer in other party) This document has important legal consequences. Consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to its completion or modification. Any singular reference to Contractor, Surety. Owner or other party shag be considered Plural where applicable. 5 Page 1 of 4 § 1 The Contractor and Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns to the Owner to pay- for labor, materials and equipment furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract, which is incorporated herein by reference, subject to the following terms. § 2 If the Contractor promptly makes payment of all sums due to Claimants, and defends, indemnities and holds harmless the Owner from claims. demands, liens or suits by any person or entity seeking payment for labor, materials or equipment furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract, their the Surety and the Contractor shall have no obligation under this Bond. § 3 If there is no Owner Default under the Construction Connect, the Surety's obligation to the Owner under this Bond shall arise after the Owner has promptly notified the Contractor and the Surety (at the address described in Section 13) of claims, demands, liens or suits against the Owner or the Owner's property by any person or entity seeking payment for labor, materials or equipment burnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract and tendered defense of such claims, demands, liens or suits to the Contractor and the Surety. § 4 When the Owner has satisfied the conditions in Section 3, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety's expense defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner against a duly tendered claim, demand, lien or suit. § 6 The Surety's obligations to a Claimant under this Bond shall arise after the following: § 6.1 Claimants, who do not have a direct contract with the Contractor, .1 have furnished a written notice of non-payment to the Contractor, stating with substantial accuracy the amount claimed and the name of the party to whom the materials were, or equipment was, furnished or supplied or for whom the labor was done or performed, within ninety (90) days after having last performed labor or last famished materials or equipment included in the Claim: and .2 have sent a Claim to the Surety (at the address described in Section 13). § 6.2 Claimants, who are employed by or have a direct contract with the Contractor, have sent a Claim to the Surety (at the address described in Section 13). § 6 If a notice of non-payment required by Section 5.1.1 is given by the Owner to the Contractor, that is sufficient to satisfy a Claimant's obligation to furnish a written notice of non-payment under Section 5.7.1. § 7 When a Claimant has satisfied the conditions of Sections 5.1 or 5.2, whichever is applicable, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety's expense take the following actions: § 7.1 Send an answer to the Claimant, with a copy to the Owner, within sixty (60) days atter receipt of the Claim, stating the amounts that are undisputed and the basis for challenging any amounts that are disputed: and § 7.2 Pay or arrange for payment of any undisputed amounts § 7.3 The Surety's failure to discharge its obligations under Section 7.1 or Section 7.2 shall not be deemed to constitute a waiver of defenses the Surety or Contractor may have or acquire as to a Claim, except as to undisputed amounts for which the Surety and Claimant have reached agreement. If, however. the Surety fails to discharge its obligations under Section 7.1 or Section 7.2, the Surety shall indemnify, the Claimant for the reasonable attorney's fees the Claimant incurs thereafter to recover any stuns found to be due and owing to the Clamant. § 8 The Surety's total obligation shall not exceed the amount of this Bond, plus the amount of reasonable attorney's fees provided under Section 7.3, and the amount of this Bond shalt be credited for any payments made in good faith by the Surety. § 9 Amounts owed by the Owner to the Contractor under the Construction Contract shall be used for the performance of the Construction Contract and to satisfy, claims, if any, under any construction performance bond. By the Contractor furnishing and the Owner accepting this Bond, they agree That all funds canned by the Contractor in the performance of the Construction Contract are dedicated to satisfy obligations of the Contractor and Surety under this Bond, subject to the Owner's priority to use the funds for the completion of the work. Page 2 of 4 S 10 The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner. Claimants or others for obligations of the Contractor that are unrelated to the Construction Contract. The Owner shall not be liable for the payment of any costs or expenses of any Claimant under this Bond, and shall have under this Bond no obligation to make payments to, or give notice on behalf of_ Claimants or otherwise have any obligations to Claimants under this Bond. S 11 The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to the Construction Contract or to related subcontracts, purchase orders and other obligations. S 12 No suit or action shall be commenced by a Claimant under this Bond other than in a court of competent jurisdiction in the state in which the project that is the subject of the Construction Contract is located or after the expiration of one year from the date (1) on which the Claimant sent a Claim to the Surety pursuant to Section 5.1.2 or 5.2, or (2) on which the last labor or service was performed by anyone or the last materials or equipment were furnished by anyone under the Construction Contract, whichever of (1) or (2) first occurs. If the provisions of this Paragraph are void or prohibited by law, the minimum period of limitation available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit shall be applicable. S 13 Notice and Claims to the Surety, the Owner or the Contractor shall be mailed or delivered to the address shown on the page on which their signature appears. Actual receipt of notice or Claims, however accomplished, shall be sufficient compliance as of the date received. S 14 When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location where the construction was to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement shall be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be deemed incorporated herein. When so furnished, the intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond. S 15 Upon request by any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of this Bond, the Contractor and Owner shall promptly furnish a copy of this Bond or shall permit a copy to be made. S 16 Definitions S 16.1 Claim. A written statement by the Claimant including at a minimum: .1 the name of the Claimant; .2 the name of the person for whom the labor was done, or materials or equipment furnished; .3 a copy of the agreement or purchase order pursuant to which labor, materials or equipment was furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract: .4 a brief description of the labor, materials or equipment furnished; .5 the date on which the Claimant last performed labor or last furnished materials or equipment for use in the performance of the Construction Contract; .6 the total amount earned by the Claimant for labor, materials or equipment furnished as of the date of the Claim; .7 the total amount of previous payments received by the Claimant; and .8 the total amount due and unpaid to the Claimant for labor, materials or equipment furnished as of the date of the Claim. S 16.2 Claimant. An individual or entity having a direct contract with the Contractor or with a subcontractor of the Contractor to furnish labor, materials or equipment for use in the performance of the Construction Contract. The term Claimant also includes any individual or entity that has rightfully asserted a claim under an applicable mechanics's lien or similar statute against the real property upon which the Project is located. The intent of this Bond shall be to include without limitation to the terms "labor, materials or equipment" that part of water, gas, power, light, heat, oil, gasoline, telephone service or rental equipment used in the Construction Contract, architectural and engineering services required for performance of the work of the Contractor and the Contractor's subcontractors, and all other items for which a mechanic's lien may be asserted in the jurisdiction where the labor, materials or equipment were furnished. S 16.3 Construction Contract. The agreement between the Owner and Contractor identified on the cover page, including all Contract Documents and all changes made to the agreement and the Contract Documents. Page 3 of 4 § 18.4 Owner Default_ Failure of the Owner, which has not been remedied or waived. to pay die Contiactor as required under the Construction Contractor to perfm'rn and complete or comply with the other material terms of the Construction Contract. § 18.5 Contract Documents. All the documents that comprise the agreement between the Owner and Contractor. § 17 If this Bond is issued for an agreement between a Contractor and subcontractor, the term Contractor in this Bond shalt be deemed to be Subcontractor and the term Owner shall be deemed to be Contractor. § 18 Modifications to this bond are as follows: (Space isptovided below fia-additional somatwes of added parties, other than those appearing on the cover page.) CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY Company: (Corporate Seal) Company: (Corporate Seal) Signature: _ Name and Title: Address Signature: _ Name and Title: Address Page 4 of 4 Principal: Airport Electric Co Agency Name: Bonding Servi POWER OF AYTORNEY The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company Bond Number: 601115330 Agent Code: 126651 Know All bran by These Presents: That The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company, pursuant to the authority granted by Article IV, Section 12 of the Code of Regulations and By -Laws Of The Ohio Casualty Insurance Cmnpany, do hereby nominate, constitute and appoint: Annette Albach, Stephanie Sheller of Schaumburg, Illinois its hue and lawful agents) and am toey(ies}m-facl to make, execute, seal and deliver for and on its behalf as surety, and as its act and deed any and all BONDS, RECOGNIZANCES, excluding, however, any bonUNDERTAKINGS and or undertaking(s) guaranteeing the payment Orontes and interest thereon. And the execution of such bonds or undertakings in pursuance of these presents, shall be as binding upon said Company, as fully and amply, to all intents and purposes, as if they had been duly executed and acknowledged by the regularly elected officers of said Company at their administrative offices in Keene, New Hampshire, in their own proper persons. The authority granted hereunder supersedes any previous authority heretofore granted the above named attomey(ies}in-0act. In WITNESS WHEREOF, the undersigned officer of the said "The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company has hereunto subscribed his name and affixed the Corporate Seal of said Company this 26th day of September, 2016. J 02-- '4''!,2 R 1••.: David M. Carey, Assistam Secretary STATE OF PENNSYLVANIA COUNTY OF MONTGOMERY On this 26th day of September, 2016 before the subscriber, a Notary Public of the State of Pennsylvania, in and for the County of Montgomery, duly commissioned and qualified, came David M. Carey, Assistant Secretary t The Ohio Caof the Insurance Company, to me personally known to be the individual and officer described in, and who executed the preceding instrument, and he acknowledged the execution of the same, and being by me dulv sworn deposes and says that he is the officer of the Company aforesaid, and that the seal affixed to the preceding instrument is the Corporate Seal of said Company. and the said Corporate Seal and his signature as ocer were duly affixed and subscribed to the said instrument by the authority and direction of the said Corporation. Officer IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed my Official Scat al the City of King of Pntssia, Stale of Pennsylvania, the day and year first above wntten. 6 PAN° Q• Fig= O ��+ Notary• he in and for County L.fM..hmmc,,. State of Pennsylvania P eo�wnouidea My Commission expires March 28, 2021 This power ofar omey is granted order and by authority of Article IV, Section 12 of die By -Laws of The Ohio Casual Insurance Com y Casualty party, eznacts from which read ARTICLE IV - Officers: Section 12. Power of Attorney Any officer or other official of the Corporation authorized for that purpose in writing by the Chairman or the President, and subject to such limitation as the Chairman or President may prescribe, shall appoint such attorneys -in -fact, as may be necessary to act in behalf of the Corporation to make, execute, seal, acknowledge and deliver as surety any and all undertakings, bond, recognizances and other surety obligations. Such attorneys -in -fact, subject to the limitations set forth in their respective powers of attorney, shall have full instruments to bind the Corporation by their signature and execution of any such insments and to attach thereto the seal of the Corporation. When m execured, such instruments shall be as binding as if signed by the President and attested to by the Secretary, Any power or authority granted to any representative or atm ct:Y im-fact under the provisions of this article may be revoked at any time by the BOuld, die Chairman. die President or by the officer or officers granting such power or authority. This certificate and the above power of attorney may be signed by facsimile or mechanically reproduced signatures under and b} authority of the following vote of the board of directors of The Ohio Casualty insurance Company effective on the 15th day of Febntary, 2011 VOTED that the facsimile or mechanically reproduced signature of any assistant secretary of the company, wherever appearing upon a can ified copy of am power of attorney issued by ur the company in connection with sety Mods, shalt be valid and winding upon the company with the more force and effect as Hough manually affixed. - CERTIFICATE I , the undersigned Assistant Secretary of The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company, do hereby certify that the foregoing power of attorney, the referenced By -Laws of tie Company and the above resolution of their Board of Directors are true and correct copies and are in full force and effect on this date. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, t have hereunto set my hand and the seal of the Company this 10th day of February 2017 < H�e ewellyn, Assistant Secretary